JP2013132495A - Game system and game device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game system and a game device for preventing a player from being confused as much as possible in player's operability as compared with an old system while identifying a game result of the player by computation of data without directly putting out a game medium even in occurrence of winning.SOLUTION: In the system where CU is connected to a Pachinko machine, CU does not return cards when operation for converting the total game points to awarded points is not performed, and CU appropriately determines game information based on setting stored for use when appropriately determining the game information.

Description

  The present invention includes a gaming system that includes a gaming machine that grants a predetermined gaming point upon occurrence of a prize, and a gaming device that enables gaming by the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player, and The present invention relates to a gaming device.

  As a conventional game system of this type, there are a plurality of pachinko machines, and a counter counter provided in each pachinko machine for counting game balls paid out from the pachinko machine due to the occurrence of a prize, A gaming system is known that includes a card unit that records and discharges the counting results of each counter (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-12053 A

  However, in this type of conventional gaming system, the game balls are paid out directly when a winning occurs, so the management of the game balls is difficult, and the ball counters that count the game balls are also difficult to manage. Maintenance was necessary to prevent clogging.

  Therefore, it is conceivable to adopt a sealed pachinko machine in which game balls are encapsulated, and not to pay out game balls when a winning occurs, but to add a game ball data. . When such a system is adopted, a counting operation for counting game balls is not required, so that game ball data is recorded on a card and discharged at the end of the game.

  However, a player who is familiar with the old game system provided in each pachinko machine has a counter operation for returning the card on which the counting result is recorded after counting the game balls that have been paid out. Since it is customary to stand up with a card that has been ejected, there is a risk that the above system will end up with a sense of incongruity or confusion when the card is returned without any counting operation. There is.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and the purpose of the present invention is to identify the player's game result by calculating data without directly paying out the game medium even if a prize is generated, but has traditionally been used. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system and a gaming apparatus that do not confuse the player as much as possible in terms of the player's operability as compared with the system of the above.

(1) The present invention uses a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and a gaming value (for example, a card balance, the number of possessed balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables a game with P and S units,
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming device is:
Setting storage means (S757 in FIG. 82) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Appropriateness determination means (S807 to S810 in FIG. 85) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming device, fraud on the gaming machine side can be determined, and a management device connected to the gaming machine or gaming device can be used as gaming information. Compared with determining whether or not the numerical value is appropriate, the burden on the management device or the like can be reduced.

(2) The present invention uses a gaming value owned by a player (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) to give a predetermined gaming point (P units, S A gaming device (CU) that enables gaming on a table,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (CU control unit 323),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on the condition that the conversion processing has been completed, the game points are used as the holding points for the predetermined processing (in the gift exchange) A process for accepting a card and consuming the points specified by the card and enabling the exchange of prizes, and a case where the card discharged from the CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used. CU processing) is performed so that the recording medium processing (processing that makes it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card or ID management with the computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323);
Setting storage means (S757 in FIG. 82) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Appropriateness determination means (S807 to S810 in FIG. 85) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. For this reason, the game media obtained by the game can be counted, and the counting result can be specified by the recording media. For a new game using the game points without causing confusion to the player who is used to the conventional game operation. Equipment can be provided.

  Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming device, fraud on the gaming machine side can be determined, and a management device connected to the gaming machine or gaming device can be used as gaming information. Compared with determining whether or not the numerical value is appropriate, the burden on the management device or the like can be reduced.

(3) In the gaming system according to (1),
The gaming machine is
Game machine side setting storage means (S774 in FIG. 84) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
And a gaming machine side suitability judging means (S827 to S830 in FIG. 86) for judging whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the gaming machine side setting storing means.

  According to such a configuration, in addition to determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming device, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming machine. Therefore, even when any of the gaming machine and the gaming device is cheated, the abnormality determination can be appropriately performed.

(4) In the gaming system according to (1) (3),
The gaming device includes disabling means (S811 to S814 in FIG. 85; card discharge processing is prohibited) that disables the predetermined processing when the inappropriateness determination is made by the appropriateness determining means.

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined process is disabled when an improper determination is made, the predetermined process is performed by a predetermined recording medium processing operation after an illegal act. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming system according to (1) (3) (4),
The gaming machine includes game information transmitting means (latest game table information in FIG. 8, FIG. 12) for transmitting game information to the gaming device,
The suitability determining means determines whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted by the game information transmitting means is appropriate (S801 to S807 in FIG. 85).

  According to such a configuration, for example, the gaming machine is not cheating at all, and the gaming information is altered from the gaming machine to the gaming device by cheating in the communication portion between the gaming machine and the gaming device. Even when is transmitted, abnormality determination is made by the suitability determination means on the gaming device side, and as a result, it is possible to determine fraud in the communication portion.

  (6) In the gaming system of (1) (3) to (5) above, when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means (Y in S810 of FIG. 85), It further includes error transmitting means (S812 in FIG. 85) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate to the host device.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is transmitted from the gaming device to the host device, the host device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(7) (1) In the gaming system according to (3) to (6),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(8) In the gaming system according to (1) (3) to (7),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure which shows the structure of the flame | frame used by the communication performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a CU state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a status information response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the meaning of various numbers of balls, and the content of the confirmation point. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game machine state 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of each bit of the game stand state 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the classification information in game information. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the prize ball information in game information. It is the figure explaining in more detail the error content of a game machine error state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card insertion notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card insertion response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the card return notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a card return response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a recovery detailed request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery process of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a detailed recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication termination request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the communication end response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test request | requirement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication test response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of money_receiving | payment to the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. Processing when the number of game balls decreases on the P platform side when an addition request occurs will be described. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting a part of game ball. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when subtracting all the game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls automatically when leaving a seat. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning the inserted card | curd. It is a figure which shows another example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case a count operation is prompted when the return operation of the inserted card is detected. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when collect | recovering the inserted card | curd automatically. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting operation is detected during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection before transmitting a command from a card unit to a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the command from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the command of the addition request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication circuit disconnection, and the response of the addition response from a pachinko machine to a card unit has not reached | attained. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when power is disconnected and a communication circuit is disconnected before transmitting a command from the card unit to the pachinko machine, and a communication partner after restoration is inconsistent. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and a command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and communication partners after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and a response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached, and communication partners after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power cut and a communication circuit disconnection, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and the communication counterparts after restoration do not match. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and the response of the addition response from the pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached, and the communication counterpart after the restoration is inconsistent. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection, and an addition request command from the card unit to the pachinko machine has not yet reached, and the communication counterparts after recovery match. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of the game ball addition result abnormality at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of resending the game ball | bowl addition result at the time of ball lending, possession ball payout, and storage ball payout. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when the response from a pachinko machine to the card unit has not yet reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the resending process of the command from a card unit to a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the possession ball sharing process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the wagon service process performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the example of a combination of the structure of the system for games. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of the system for games when a game ball is more than predetermined number. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship with the game board and game frame (front frame) of a pachinko machine about fraud detection processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the information transmitted from the main control board with respect to the information request | requirement of a payout control board, in order to perform a fraud detection process. It is a flowchart which shows control of the fraud detection process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart showing the fraud detection process in a game. It is an example of the dollar box display performed with the indicator of a card unit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation process of the re-play button of FIG. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the operation process of a count button. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of count operation. It is a flowchart for demonstrating control of the payout control part and CU control part by a radio wave sensor. (A) is a flowchart showing a security-related information management process as a process executed on the upper server side, and (B) is a security-related information setting process as a process executed on the CU3 side (CU control unit 323). It is a flowchart to show. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of information processing related to P-unit security. It is a flowchart which shows P unit security related information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by CU. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed with P units. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Each game island (not shown) arranged in the game hall (hall) has an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as a game machine, pachinko machine, or P machine) 2 as an example of a game machine. Has been. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes.

  The pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to make one shot of the enclosed ball. The game board 26 is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27 in front of the game board 26. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the batting operation handle 25, and the player's hand. Is detected by the touch sensor, and the firing motor 18 is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted in accordance with the amount of rotation of the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first type of pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278 is provided in the center of the game area 27. In addition, the game area 27 is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27 shown in FIG. 1, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271, three normal winning holes 272, 273, 274 and three start winning holes 275, 276, 277 are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276 is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278 variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275, 276, 277. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271 is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided at a position below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 to the player.

  Further, a counting button 28 is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25 in the pachinko machine 2 for counting the game balls to the holding balls. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28 is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game balls to the holding balls, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game balls currently held are considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed.

  Thus, since the counting button 28 is provided on the P table side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P table can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28 is provided on the CU side.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the card unit according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessed balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. Have In the pachinko machine 2, a ball game equivalent to the number of balls specified by the data of game balls is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. A membership card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305 described above, on the surface facing the player, the display 312 and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (also simply referred to as the card ID) and the membership card when the membership card is received. An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320 receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the ID and a remote control (not shown) possessed by an attendant of the game hall. An IR light receiving unit that converts the signal into an electronic signal and outputs it is provided.

  The display 312 displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a converted game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the possession ball may be provided, and the replay button 319 may be a button dedicated to withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the member card, but is stored in association with the member card number in a hall server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding stored ball is stored based on the member card number. It is configured to be searchable. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server in association with the card number. When storing in the hall server in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server may be written in the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28 is operated and the counting process is performed. Or when storing the card in a batch.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

A ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321 and a return button 322 are further provided on the front side of the card unit 3. The ball lending button 321 is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the pachinko machine 2. The return button 322 is operated when the player finishes the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + counting operation) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. The pachinko machine 2 according to the present embodiment can be divided into a gaming board 26 and other gaming machine frames as described above. In particular, the gaming board 26 is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the gaming machine frame is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, it is sufficient for the game store to replace only the game board when replacing a new stand.

  All winning balls that are won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball apparatus, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and guided to the collection ball passing path 901. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flow path 702. The out ball flow path 702 is provided with an out ball detection switch 701, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls flow down the foul ball return path 151 and flow down from the foul ball return port 150 through the foul ball return path 902 and the recovery ball passage path 901. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151, a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down is provided.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 enters the recovery ball passage path 901, flows down together with the winning ball and the foul ball, and enters the ball collection path 189. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the foul ball merge are detected.

  Further, a 50 replenishment detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at an intermediate position on the downstream side of the shot ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether or not the number of pachinko balls built in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 collects and detects all the pachinko balls that have been shot into the game area 27, and the number of shot balls that have been shot into the game area 27 and the number of shot balls that have been shot. When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The fired ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used for detecting that the number of encapsulated balls built in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the last 50th pachinko balls of the enclosed balls that are stopped in a non-operating state in which no game is being performed are displayed. The position is configured to be located between the 50 replenishment detection switch 904 and the firing ball detection switch 903.

As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the pachinko balls that are parked in a state where they are not being played will exceed the detection position of the firing ball detection switch 903. The fired ball detection switch 903 is always in a ball detection state, thereby making it possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of encapsulated balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls that are parked in the non-game state are located downstream of the detection position of the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, and the replenishment 50 The individual detection switch 904 enters a non-detection state where no ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too smaller than the predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko balls that have flowed down the ball collection path 189 enter a transport device 190 for transporting the pachinko balls upward. The conveyance device 190 includes a conveyance screw 190b that is rotated by the conveyance motor 40, and the pachinko ball is conveyed upward by the rotation of the conveyance screw 190b. The conveying device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 that polish the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of conveyance, and the surface of the pachinko balls is polished while being conveyed upward. The The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish the pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball entrance of the transport device 190, and a pachinko ball entering the transport device 190 is detected. On the other hand, a pachinko ball conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by a ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying pachinko balls one by one to the ball launch position. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the firing motor 18 is driven and the hitting hammer 920 is intermittently swung. One pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is ejected by the hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 916a and a ball feed member 916b that swings up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 916a in order to supply pachinko balls one by one to the ball firing positions by the hitting hammer 920. Yes. The ball feed member 916b has a U-shape as shown in FIG. 2, and receives one pachinko ball that has flowed down, and in this state, the rectifier solenoid 916a is excited to drive the ball by its driving force. The member 916b swings downward. Then, the received pachinko ball is supplied to the ball hitting position. When the hitting hammer 920 bounces the supplied pachinko ball, the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The hitting hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the hitting direction of the hitting ball, and the hitting hammer 920 is moved in the direction opposite to the hitting direction (back swing direction) by the action of a cam that is rotated by the driving force of the firing motor 18. It is swung. Then, when the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the cam action is released and the hitting hammer 920 is rocked in the driving direction by the biasing force of the spring, so that the pachinko ball is bullet-launched. The spring urging in the hitting direction can be adjusted by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting momentum can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The ball removal portion 915 is provided with a ball removal motor 915a. When a game attendant operates a ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay board 921, the ball removal motor 915a rotates by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be extracted out of the path.

The ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is used for the on / off control of the conveyance motor 40 by the detection signal. In a state where the hitting operation by the hitting operation handle 25 is not performed and the hitting ball is not being fired, the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation. Is stopped and stopped. When the pachinko ball to be stopped reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball detection signal is constantly output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. When the continuous output state of such a ball detection signal continues for a predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds), the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped and the transport of the ball upward is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to fire the hitting ball, the rectifier 916 executes a ball feeding operation. As a result, the ball that has stopped and stopped at the rectifier 916 is stopped. The ball detection signal is not output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. Since the number of balls raised per unit time by driving the conveyance motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls firing per unit time by driving the firing motor 18, the driving of the conveyance motor 40 is started. When a little time has passed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again outputs a ball detection signal, and the driving of the carry motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hitting of the hit ball continues, the ball detection signal is not output again from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and a ball is conveyed. In the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The detection of game ball launching, which detects that the number of game balls has been fired into the game area 27, is detected by the change of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on the payout control board 17 (see FIG. 5) on which the payout control unit 171 is provided. Based on this detection, the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor (not shown). This firing motor origin sensor is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 stops when the player releases his / her hand from a touch link (not shown) provided on the hitting operation handle 25, and when the firing motor origin sensor detects the origin of the firing motor 18 at the time of the stop. To control the firing motor 18 to stop.

  In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, if the launch motor 18 is deviated from the origin position and the output of the launch motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the launch motor 18 is rotated forward depending on the current position of the launch motor 18. Alternatively, control is performed to reverse the position and move the stop position of the firing motor 18 to the origin without firing the pachinko ball. The current stop position of the firing motor 18 is compared with the position of the origin to determine whether the firing motor 18 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction in the direction of rotation close to the origin position. You may make it move a stop position to an origin by carrying out rotation control to.

  Similarly, a ball removal motor origin sensor (not shown) is provided in the ball removal motor 915a, and the ball removal motor 915a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The above-described winning ball detection switch, 50 replenishment detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, and out ball detection switch 701 are electrostatic capacitances due to the passage of balls. It consists of proximity switches that detect changes in On the other hand, only the shot ball detection switch 903 is configured by a photosensor of a light projecting / receiving type. In amusement halls, there are cases where fraudulent acts using radio waves are performed in which fraudulent radio waves are transmitted to misdetect the ball detection switch. When such an improper radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may be erroneously detected, but the photosensor has no risk of erroneous detection.

As a result, when a fraudulent act of transmitting an improper radio wave occurs, the winning ball detection switch, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by proximity switches, output detection signals associated with erroneous detection. However, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the fired ball detection switch 903 formed of a photosensor, the total number of detected balls and the fired ball of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the winning ball detection switch. A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection switch 903. As a result, fraudulent acts caused by radio waves can be monitored. It should be noted that the winning ball detection switch, the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the ball raising switch (lower) 41b, the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the shot ball detection switch 903 are provided. , All may be composed of the same type of switch.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2. With reference to FIG. 5, the outline of the control circuit of the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described.

The card unit 3 is provided with a CU control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. This CU control unit 323 is a CPU (Central Processing) as a control center.
Unit), a ROM (Read Only Member) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random Access Memory) that functions as a work area for the CPU
), An input / output interface or the like is provided for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The CU control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801 (see FIG. 6) for security management, and the pachinko machine 2 A security board 325 for communicating with the payout control board 17 while ensuring security is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part (not shown) to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325 on the CU side and the payout control board 17 on the P platform side are communicably connected via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325 is provided with a communication control IC 325a for controlling communication between the security board 325 and the payout control board 17, and a security chip (SC) 325b for monitoring the security of the pachinko machine 2. The SC 325b further includes a fraud detection unit 1325. The fraud detection unit 1325 performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323 to the P-unit 2, and manages the key when fraud is detected. The server 800 (see FIG. 6) is notified. Further, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800 as board control information.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323. At the same time, the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323 to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card.

The CU control unit 323 manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350 and converted into display data by the display control unit 350. The display data converted by the display control unit 350 is output to the display 312 and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323 via the display control unit 350. When the player operates the ball lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. The ball lending button 321 is not limited to the configuration provided in the CU 3, and may be configured so as to be provided in the P platform 2 and input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323.

  In the pachinko machine 2, the main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, the payout control board 17 that manages and stores the game balls, and the drive control of the launch motor 18 based on commands from the payout control board 17 And a variable display device 278 are provided. In FIG. 5, a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16 is not shown.

The main control board 16 is provided on the game board 26. The main control board 16 is equipped with a game control microcomputer as the main control unit 161. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a CPU work area. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161 is connected to a winning sensor 162 and a radio wave sensor 163 provided on the game board 26. The game board 26 is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278 and the like.

The payout control board 17 is provided on the front frame 6 (game frame). The payout control board 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Member) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

Further, the above-described firing ball detection switch 903, out ball detection switch 701, foul ball detection switch 33, counting button 28, and radio wave sensor 173 are provided in a state in which the discharge control board 17 is electrically connected. The radio wave sensor 173 is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173 is input to the payout control unit 171 via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Accordingly, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173. Details will be described with reference to FIG. Note that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a but also the fired ball detection switch 903 (see FIG. 2) may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is always turned on by unauthorized radio waves, ball firing is not detected, while the actually fired ball is recovered and detected by the firing ball detection switch 903. In such a case, the number of fired balls and recovered balls (out balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information 2 of “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. (It will be described later in FIG. 13). However, the fraud detection information 2 of the “number of fired / OUT inconsistent balls” is not transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 by sending an improper radio wave to the firing ball detection switch 903 to make it undetectable. Occurs. In the present embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173 also detects unauthorized radio waves transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch 903, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  From main control board 16 to payout control board 17, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, number of symbols determined, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID (also referred to as main chip ID) is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16 of the pachinko machine 2, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is turned on. Information. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls when a game ball enters the winning opening). It is transmitted to the dispensing control board 17 when the machine 2 is turned on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17 when the pachinko machine 2 is powered on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-short information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the out ball detection signal is input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control board 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903 to the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 to which the fired ball detection signal is input updates the number of balls in game by subtraction.

  The security board 325 of the card unit 3 and the payout control board 17 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected. As will be described later, a recovery request, a recovery detail request, and communication start from the security board 325 to the payout control board 17 Various commands such as a request, a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the recovery information, as will be described later. The payout control board 17 receives the recovery request and notifies the card unit 3 of the recovery information of the pachinko machine 2. The recovery detail request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to notify the recovery detailed information. The payout control board 17 receives the recovery detail request and notifies the card unit 3 of the recovery detailed information of the pachinko machine 2. The communication start request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to start communication. The payout control board 17 responds to the card unit 3 with the communication start in response to the communication start request. The communication end request is a command for requesting the pachinko machine 2 to end communication. The payout control board 17 receives a communication end request and responds to the card unit 3 with a communication end.

  The status information request is a command that requests the pachinko machine 2 to notify the status information. The payout control board 17 receives the status information request and notifies the card unit 3 of the status information of the pachinko machine 2. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17 receives a card insertion notification and responds to the card unit 3 that a card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17 receives a card return notification and responds to the card unit 3 that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying the pachinko machine 2 of test data. The payout control board 17 responds with test data to the card unit 3 in response to the communication test request.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery detail response, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17 to the security board 325.

  The front frame 6 (game frame) is provided with a firing control board 31 and a firing motor 18. The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18 when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting ball operating handle 25 is input.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  A display 54 is provided in the front frame 6 (game frame). The display unit 54 receives display data from the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3 and displays a display screen. As described above, in this embodiment, the P-side display 54 is controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54 is controlled to be displayed on the P-side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls display of the display 54 based on a command from the payout control unit 171.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 6, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323, security board 325, payout control unit 171, or main control board 16, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 6. For the abnormality mentioned here, the CU control unit 323, the security board 325, the payout control unit 171, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, or malfunction or failure occurs due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 6 manages a key that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component in the card unit 3. It is a server. The key management server 800 is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the security substrate 325 of the card unit 3, the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control unit 323 and the security substrate 325 described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325b when the security chip 325b of the security board 325 is manufactured. Further, when the CU 3 is brought into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800 of the key management center via the hall server 801 and stored in the CU control unit 323. The

  When the CU control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the security board 325, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350 of the card unit 3. The CU control unit 323 controls the display 312 to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350 to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the security board 325 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171 of a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that fact. . In response, the payout control unit 171 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control to operate the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the payout control unit 171, the CU control unit 323 is notified of this, and the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall server 801 accordingly.

As described above, when the security board 325 detects an abnormality of the CU control unit 323, the security board 325 notifies the payout control unit 171 of that fact. The notification destination of abnormality occurrence by the security board 325 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. In addition, the security board 325 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout control unit 171 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325 notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, the security board 325 detects that fact and notifies the CU control unit 323 that the abnormality has occurred. The CU control unit 323 performs the above-described abnormality notification control. The hall server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171, it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the main control board 16, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17 detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325, while notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16. It detects and notifies the security board 325 that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325 described above, the payout control board 17 is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, the security board 325 and the payout control board 17 may be provided with an abnormality notification function to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration of a frame used for communication in the gaming machine. In FIG. 7, transmission data (business message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. That is, the business message is not divided and transmitted. In addition, when transmitting business messages continuously, an interval of 1 millisecond or more is provided.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a serial number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Serial number” indicates the sequence number of the business message. “Serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”. However, the “serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. “Command” is a command code of a business message. The “data part” is business message data.

  The business message range is the encryption target range. The data length, serial number, and command data length are each 1 byte. The business message range and the encryption target range do not need to match, and for example, the data portion can be set as the encryption target range.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the card unit 3 side and the pachinko machine 2 side, and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 8, main ones of various data stored on the card unit 3 side (CU side) and the pachinko machine 2 side (P base side) and transmission / reception modes thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2 side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU 3 side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2 side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of stored balls, and the card balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3 side.

  FIG. 8 shows RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323 on the CU 3 side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17 on the P stand 2 side. First, when the power supply is turned on for the first time when the P stand 2 (pachinko machine 2) and the CU 3 (card unit 3) are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game hall, the payout control board on the P stand 2 side. 17 has a main chip ID (main control chip ID) transmitted from the main control board 16, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3 side, and also issues a payout chip ID (payout) stored in the payout control board 17 itself. Control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3 side.

  On the CU3 side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, data of the connection time, that is, the time at which communication is started after the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P base 2 side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3 side are stored on the CU3 side and the P stand 2 side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side.

  On the CU 3 side, the transmitted data is collated with the data already stored, and it is determined whether or not the same P base 2 is connected as in the previous time. As for the connection time data, every time the power is turned on, new connection time data in which communication between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side is started is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side. Time data is stored on the P table 2 side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3 side and the P base 2 side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3 and the P unit 2. The last serial number is a number updated at the end of the updated communication number.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3 backs up and stores the serial number transmitted to the P base 2 by a command, and when it receives the serial number from the P base 2 next, it rewrites the serial number stored in the backup and stores it. Then, when the next command is transmitted, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P unit 2, and the transmitted serial number is stored in the backup. In CU3, such processing is repeated.

  Similarly, the serial number received from the CU3 by the command is backed up and stored in the P unit 2, and when the response is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU3 next time, the serial number stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. Store the sent serial number as a backup. When the next response is received, the serial number stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received serial number. Such processing is repeated in the P stand 2.

  For example, a command is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P base 2 side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted serial number n is stored on the P base 2 side. Then, when a response is returned from the P platform 2 side to the CU 3 side, the stored serial number n is added together (n + 1) and transmitted. On the CU3 side, since the returned serial number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored serial number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the next time the command is sent, the serial number is incremented by 1 and n + 2. A serial number is sent to the P stand 2 side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171 (see FIG. 5) on the P table 2 side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2 side to the CU 3 side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball that has been placed in the game area 27 wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, an additional ball to which a gaming ball is added based on the winning information. The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. Also, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (subtraction ball number) is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171 counts the number of gaming balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting number of balls) from the P stand 2 side to the CU3 side.

  On the P-unit 2 side, each time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3 side, the count values are stored in the previous gaming machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, the game table information transmitted to the CU 3 side immediately before is added to the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before). Stored as data. When the latest game machine information is not transmitted from the P machine 2 side to the CU 3 side, the backup data includes not only the value of each counter at the time of the next transmission but also the value of each counter of the previous time that was not transmitted. It is intended to enable transmission.

  Further, the payout control board 17 updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU 3 side as the number of game balls.

On the CU3 side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value (number of added balls) of the added ball counter transmitted from the P stand 2 side to update the number of balls. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2 side. Further, based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P stand 2, the number of card holding balls is added and updated. In this way, the CU 3 can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2 one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3 has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball number counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2 side. CU3 updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU 3 stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, for halls). Error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P unit 2 side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU 3 side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU 3 side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P-unit 2 side. (CU3 side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2 side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3 side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3 side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3 side and the Pball 2 side are stored by the hall server 801 or the hall management computer connected to the CU3. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the CU 3 stores a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of additional balls (the number of additional balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, a press input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

The CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 provided in the CU 3 when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323 (see FIG. 5) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321).

  When the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU 3 side to the P stand 2 side. In response to this, the P stand 2 side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image in which, in a conventional encapsulated pachinko machine in which each counter is provided, it is prohibited to grab a ball before counting remaining on a plate by hand and use it for a wagon service.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2 side to the CU 3 side. In response to this, the CU3 side subtracts the number of game balls and adds and updates the number of card possessions.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the outline of the command and response transmitted / received between the card unit (CU) 3 and the pachinko machine (P unit) 2 will be described.

  FIG. 9 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information from the P unit 2. A response named “recovery response” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information.

  A command named “recovery detail request” is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This recovery detail request command is for requesting recovery detail information from the P unit 2. A response named “Recovery Detail Response” is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. This response of the recovery detail response notifies the CU 3 of the recovery detail information.

  A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. This communication start request command requests the P base 2 to start communication. A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response to the communication start response is a response to the CU 3 for communication start.

  A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2 to end communication. A response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This communication end response is a response to the end of communication to the CU3.

  A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 uses this command to periodically check the status of the P base 2. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU side to the P platform side shown in FIG.

  A response of a status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. This response of the status information response is to notify the information / status of the P platform 2 to the CU 3. The response of the information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card insertion notification command notifies the P unit 2 of card insertion. A response of the card insertion response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card insertion response is a response to the card insertion to the CU3.

  A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. This card return notification command notifies the P unit 2 of a card return. A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to CU3.

  A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of test data. A response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to CU3.

  Next, based on FIGS. 10 to 35, the command / response status information request, status information response, card insertion notification, card insertion response, card return notification, card return response, recovery request, recovery response shown in FIG. Details of the recovery detail request, recovery detail response, transmission start request, communication start response, communication start response, communication end request, communication end response, communication test request, and communication test response will be described in detail.

  First, referring to FIG. 10, a status information request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted status information request command notifies the P unit 2 of the status of the CU 3. Note that the CU 3 periodically collects information and status of the P platform 2 using this command.

  The specific data of this status information request includes data of serial number, command, CU status, number of added balls, and CU error status, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x06” in binary data expressed in hexadecimal.

  The CU state represents the state of CU3 to be notified to the P-unit 2; when Bit0 is “1”, the card insertion process is in progress; when Bit1 is “1”, the card unit preparation state; and Bit3 is “1”. Represents a game ball addition request, and when Bit 4 is “1”, it indicates completion of counting ball reception. Bit2, Bit5 to Bit7 are not used.

  Further, only when the CU state Bit 3 is “1”, the data of the added ball number is valid, and the data of the added ball number is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2. Further, the data on the number of added balls indicates a value added to the number of game balls.

  The CU error state represents an error code that is occurring in CU3. “0x00” indicates no error, and “0x01”-“0xFF” indicates that an error is occurring.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating each bit in the CU state in more detail. Bit0 shown in FIG. 11 indicates that the data name is being inserted into the card, “1” indicates that the card is being inserted, and “0” indicates that the card has not been inserted. That is, Bit0 indicates a state where a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing into a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance by the CU.

  Bit 1 indicates that the data name is in the card unit ready state, and “1” indicates that the card unit is ready, and “0” indicates that the card unit is being prepared. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit preparation state to the P base 2 according to the state of the CU3. The timing for notifying the card unit preparation OK includes, for example, completion of start-up and cancellation during absence. The timing for notifying that the card unit is being prepared includes, for example, when starting up, away from the seat, closing a store, and other operations incapable errors.

  Bit 3 indicates a game ball addition request when the data name is “1”, and indicates that there is no game ball addition request when “1” and “0”, respectively. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  Bit 4 indicates that the counting ball reception is completed, “1” counting ball reception completion, and “0” indicates no counting ball reception. That is, Bit 4 notifies that the number of balls counted at the time of counting the game balls has been received from the P unit 2. Bit 4 is used for confirmation of delivery of “count ball” in a response of a status information response described later.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The response of the status information response to be transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the information / status of the P unit 2.

  The specific data of the status information request includes serial number, command, ball count information, game machine status, fraud detection information, and game information data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for requesting status information, and is “0x16” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

The number of balls information is the number of balls in P table 2 (the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls that have passed outro, The number of award balls and the number of counting balls) and firing strength are shown. The number of game balls is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The number of fired balls is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. The number of balls that have passed through the outlet is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 145 (when there are a plurality of balls that have passed during transmission, they are added together). The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is, for example, the number of prize balls (see FIGS. 19 and 29) for each prize slot type (see FIGS. 18 and 29) such as a start opening, a big prize opening, and a prize opening (ordinary prize opening). See). The number of balls to be counted is the number of game balls counted. However, if the card unit preparation state changes from preparation OK to preparation, the number of game balls held by the gaming machine is counted and set as the number of balls to be counted. When the card unit ready state is ready, the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls by operating the counting button 28. However, if the card unit preparation state changes from preparation OK to preparation when the player is to leave the seat by remote control operation, the game ball is automatically removed without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28. Count and set as the number of balls to be counted (see FIG. 47). The firing strength is strength for launching a game ball.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the meanings of various balls and the confirmation points in more detail. As for the number of game balls shown in FIG. 14, the number of game balls held by CU 3 is calculated using “number of award balls” and “number of shot balls” described later by CU 3. Thereafter, the CU 3 checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3 matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2.

  The total number of prize balls (addition) is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The “addition request ball number” transmitted from CU3 is not included. In addition, the CU 3 adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the data of the total number of winning balls is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not add the number of gaming balls.

  The number of shot balls (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by CU3. If the data is received without holding the card, CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  The number of counting balls (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3 and added to the number of cards possessed. Note that the number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3. Further, when the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3 does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3 does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3 itself is 0.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the gaming machine state indicates the state of the P machine 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P machine 2, and the gaming machine state 1, the gaming machine state 2, It includes information on the gaming machine state 3 and the gaming machine error state.

  Bit 0 in gaming machine state 1 is permitting a game when it is “0”, and is prohibited when it is “1”. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 1 is waiting when it is “0”, and is playing when it is “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, indicating that there is no gaming ball. When Bit 3 in the gaming machine state 1 is “1”, the game is completed. Bit 4 in gaming machine state 1 is counting when it is “1”. Bit 5 in the gaming machine state 1 is a game ball addition result when “1”. Bits 6 to 7 in the gaming machine state 1 are reserved.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in more detail. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 15 indicates whether the name is game permit / game prohibition, and whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. It is in. Bit1 indicates whether the name is waiting / playing and whether the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball) or not. Not in the state), when “1”, the game is in progress (the fan is firing a ball). However, there is a game ball, and the game is being played in a state where the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25) is touched (touch sensor is touched).

Bit 2 has the name “no game ball” and indicates the presence or absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the name is game completion and the ball firing is stopped. That is, it shows whether all the floating balls in the game area 27 have been collected. “
When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (the state of all balls is unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, the game is complete (the state of all balls have been confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for more than 15 seconds after stopping the ball launch, the game will time out and the game will be completed, except for the ball stop by the launch stop switch (also called single shot switch).

  Bit 4 indicates whether the name is being counted and whether or not the game ball is being counted (counting button is being pressed), and when it is “0”, it is counting when it is “1”. Bit 5 is a game ball addition result whose name is a game ball addition process result, and is “0” for addition and “NG” for addition NG.

  Returning to FIG. 12, Bit 0 in the gaming machine state 2 is a big hit 1 (all big hits) when it is “1”. There are various types of jackpots such as jackpots and jackpots with different numbers of balls. Bit0 is “1” during any type of jackpot. Bit 1 in the game stand state 2 is 2 for big hit (big hit + small hit) when “1”. This bit 1 becomes “1” regardless of whether all the big hits or small hits. Bit 2 in the game table state 2 is 3 for big hits (big hit for Idama Dai). For example, a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds at the time of the big hit is called a big hit of the Idama Dai. Bit 3 of the game table state 2 is a big hit 4 (a big hit of a small ball) when “1”. For example, a big hit with a relatively small number of rounds at the time of a big hit is called a big hit with an Idama small. Bit 4 of the game table state 2 is a big hit 5 (a big hit in the game) when “1”. For example, a big hit with a medium number of rounds is called a big hit. Bit 5 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 6 (reserve big hit) when it is “1”. Bit 6 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 7 (spare big hit) when it is “1”. Bit 7 in the gaming machine state 2 has a big hit 8 (reserve big hit) when “1”. These spare jackpots are provided according to the demands of the manufacturer of P cars or the amusement hall. In other words, each of the spare jackpot bits is defined according to the characteristic specifications (number of rounds, number of short hours, etc.) such as the hit mode peculiar to the model developed by each manufacturer of P units. Is to be able to decide freely later.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 2 in more detail. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 16 has a jackpot name 1 (all jackpots), represents jackpot information, and sets “1” during all jackpots. Bit 1 has a big hit 2 (big hit + small hit), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 has a big hit 3 (big hit for big ball), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during big hit with big big ball. Bit 3 has a big hit 4 (big hit for small ball), represents big hit information, and sets “1” during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 has a big hit 5 (big hit in the ball), represents the big hit information, and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the ball.

  Returning to FIG. 12, Bit 0 in the gaming machine state 3 is “big hit” and “short time” when “1”. This Bit0 becomes “1” during either big hit or short time. Bit 1 in the gaming machine state 3 is in the process of being changed when it is “1”. Bit 2 in the gaming machine state 3 is short in time when it is “1”. Bit 3 to Bit 7 in the gaming machine state 3 are reserved.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining each bit in the gaming machine state 3 in more detail. Bit 0 shown in FIG. 17 has a name that is a big hit + short time, represents game state information, and is set to “1” during a big hit and short time. Bit 1 is a name whose probability is being changed, represents game state information, and is set to “1” during the probability change. Bit2 has a name that is short and short, represents gaming state information, and is set to "1" in short and long.

Returning to FIG. 12, the gaming machine error state is an error code occurring in the P machine 2 and is “0”.
When x00 ", there is no error, and when" 0x01 "-" 0xFF ", an error is occurring.

  The fraud detection information shown in FIG. 13 is information detected by the P stand 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the fraud detection state 1, the fraud detection state 2, Information of fraud detection information 1 to fraud detection information 4 is included.

  The fraud detection state 1 is fraud detection information of the main control board 16. Bit 0 of fraud detection state 1 is a state of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 1 in the fraud detection state 1 is a magnetic sensor detection state when “1”. Bit 2 in the fraud detection state 1 is a state of fraud detection when it is “1”. Bits 3 to 7 in the fraud detection state 1 are reserved.

  The fraud detection state 2 is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17. Bit 0 of fraud detection state 2 is a state in which the glass plate is open when “1”. Bit 1 in fraud detection state 2 is a state in which the frame body is open when it is “1”. Bit 2 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 in fraud detection state 2 is a state of proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 in the fraud detection state 2 is a state in which a prize ball is detected when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko or slot machine. Bit 5 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of composite goto detection when “1”. Bit 6 of fraud detection state 2 is a state of fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 in the fraud detection state 1 is a door / frame opening detection (night) state when “1”.

  The fraud detection information 1 is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor ball (the number of winning inconsistent balls) (see S664 in FIG. 76). The fraud detection information 1 is valid when Bit 4 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 2 is data indicating information on the composite sensor goto detection (number of fired / OUT mismatched balls). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The fraud detection information 2 is valid when Bit 5 of the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 3 is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The fraud detection information 3 is valid when Bit 6 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”. The fraud detection information 4 is data indicating information on the number of times the frame body is opened at night. The fraud detection information 4 is valid when Bit 7 in the fraud detection state 2 is “1”.

  The game information is information on the P device 2 at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P device 2, and includes the number of game information, type information 1 to n, and prize ball information 1 to n. It is out.

  The number of game information is the number (n) of type information / prize ball information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). The type information 1 to n indicates the game type information 1 to n, and the prize ball information 1 to n indicates the game prize ball information 1 to n.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating the type information in the game information in more detail. In the type information shown in FIG. 18, the names from Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data types, indicating the data type of game information. No information when “0”, no winning opening when “1” (ordinary winning mouth) , “2” is the big prize opening, “3” is the start winning opening, and “4” is the number of symbol stops. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are data numbers, which indicate data numbers for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, the data number.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating the prize ball information in the game information in more detail. In the prize ball information shown in FIG. 19, the names from Bit 0 to Bit 3 are the number of prize balls, and indicate the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each data type of game information. When “1” to “15”, the number of prize balls is data. The names from Bit 4 to Bit 7 are the number of winnings, and indicate the number of winnings (cumulative) for each data type of game information. No information when “0”, data of winning numbers when “1” to “15” It is.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating the error contents in the gaming machine error state in more detail. The error code “0x10” shown in FIG. 20 is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause such as ball clogging and the like with the error content of the polisher motor. The error code “0x11” is recovered by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause such as ball clogging and the like because the error content is an elevator motor error. The error code “0x15” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 1 error. The error code “0x16” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 2 error. The error code “0x17” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the ball clogging or the like with the error content of the ball passage 3 error.

  The error code “0x13” is automatically returned when the error content is too few game balls and the balls are replenished. The error code “0x12” is automatically returned by removing the ball from the ball tank because the content of the error is an excessive number of game balls. The error code “0x14” is automatically returned when the cassette is loaded with the error content not loaded. The error code “0x18” is automatically restored when the content of the error is a game ball overflow and shifts to CU3 by counting. The error code “0x19” is restored by pressing the error reset button after canceling the cause of the door switch abnormality and the like because the error content is the door switch abnormality.

  Next, referring to FIG. 21, a card insertion notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2 when the card is inserted.

  The specific data of the card insertion notification includes serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for card insertion notification and is “0x07” in binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  The card ID is ID information of the inserted card. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22, a response of the card insertion response is transmitted from P base 2 to CU3. The transmitted card insertion response response notifies the CU 3 that the card insertion notification has been normally received.

  The specific data of the card insertion response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a card insertion response, and is “0x17” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, a card return notification command is transmitted from CU 3 to P stand 2. The transmitted card return notification command is to notify the P unit 2 of the card return. Further, the CU 3 transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed.

  The specific data of this card return notification includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a card return notification and is “0x08” in binary data in hexadecimal notation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The transmitted card return response is a response to the card return notification sent to the CU 3.

  The specific data of the card return response includes data of serial number, command, card ID, and card insertion time as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a card return response, and is “0x18” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The card ID is ID information of the card being inserted. The card insertion time is the time when a card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 (see FIG. 1). The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, the day information is two digits DD, and the time information is two. This is data represented by a digit hh, minute information by two digits mm, and second information by two digits ss. Note that CU3 does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the card currently being inserted or if there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, a recovery request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The CU 3 transmits the same command first after the authentication is completed.

  The specific data of this recovery request includes a serial number and a command as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for the recovery request, and is “0x03” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of the recovery response that is transmitted notifies the CU 3 of the recovery information held by the P unit 2. Upon receiving the command, the CU 3 determines whether or not the recovery process is necessary, and transmits a recovery detail request command to the P units only when the recovery process is necessary. As shown in FIG. 26, the recovery information returned from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 includes a serial number, a command, a previous last transmission serial number, a previously inserted card ID, and a previous card insertion time.

The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of the recovery response and is “0x13” in binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The previous last transmission serial number is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3 at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The previous card insertion time is data of the insertion time of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is.

  Next, referring to FIG. 27, a recovery detail request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted recovery request command is for notifying the P unit 2 of detailed recovery information.

  As shown in the lower part of FIG. 27, the specific data of this recovery request includes data of serial number, command, previous last transmission serial number, and the number of added balls. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a recovery request, and is “0x09” in binary data in hexadecimal.

  The previous last transmission serial number is data of the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2 at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no data. The previously inserted card ID is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no inserted card.

  The number of additional balls is data on the number of additional balls of game balls, and when it is “0”, there is no data on the number of additional balls.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining in detail the recovery process of the P base 2. The recovery process for the P-unit 2 shown in FIG. 28 is added to the game ball with reference to the number of additional balls when the P-unit 2 has not performed the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the CU 3. To do. Specifically, when the added ball number data is “0” and there is no added ball, the CU 3 does not transmit the added ball number data to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 does not perform the recovery process. On the other hand, when the added ball number data is “1” to “65535” and there is an added ball, CU3 transmits the added ball number data by ball lending, holding ball payout, and accumulated ball payout to P stand 2, and P stand 2 performs a recovery process of adding the added number of balls to the current game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the response of the recovery detail response is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The response of the recovery response to be transmitted is to notify the CU 3 of the recovery detailed response held by the P unit 2. This “recovery detailed response” is a backup stored in order for the P unit 2 to transmit a recovery response to the CU 3 when the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 as the recovery process is executed. Data. As shown in FIG. 29, the recovery detailed response returned from the P-unit 2 to the CU 3 includes a serial number, a command, previous gaming machine information, previous gaming information, latest gaming machine information, and latest gaming information.

The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of the recovery response, and is “0x19” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The previous game table information is the game table information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls passed through the outlet, the total number of winning balls, and the number of counting balls. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls notified to the CU 3 last time. “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls previously notified to CU3. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls notified to the CU 3 last time. The “total prize ball number” is the total prize ball number notified to the CU 3 last time. “Counting balls” is the number of counting balls notified to CU3 last time.

  The previous game information is game information notified to the CU 3 last time, and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3 last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Type information 1” is the game type information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Type information n” is the game type information n notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 notified to the CU 3 last time. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n notified to the CU 3 last time.

  The latest game table information is the latest game table information, and includes information on the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of balls passed through the outlet, the total number of winning balls, and the number of balls counted. The latest game machine information is set to “0” when all information is not available. The “number of game balls” is the number of game balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls currently held by the P stand 2. The “out mouth passing ball count” is the number of out mouth passing balls held by the current P stand 2. The “total prize ball number” is the total number of prize balls held in the current P stand 2. The “number of counting balls” is the number of counting balls currently held by the P stand 2.

  The latest game information is the game information currently held by the P platform 2 and includes information on the number of game information, type information 1 to type information n, and prize ball information 1 to prize ball information n. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information currently held in the P table 2. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. The “type information 1” is the game type information 1 held in the current P table 2. “Type information n” is the game type information n held by the current P unit 2. “Prize ball information 1” is game prize ball information 1 held in the current P stand 2. “Prize ball information n” is game prize ball information n held in the current P stand 2.

  Note that, as shown in Note 1) in FIG. 29, the recovery information is set to ALL “0” when there is no backup data and it is indefinite. As shown in Note 2), if the CU3 has not performed the process of the “last previous transmission serial number” notified from the P table 2, the CU3 performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information and the latest game machine information. Do. When the “last previous transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3 performs the recovery process using only the latest gaming machine information.

  In addition, when recovery processing cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3 or the P unit 2), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P unit 2. For example, it is conceivable that the display information of the P base 2 is displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278. Alternatively, it is also conceivable that a display device controlled by the payout control unit 171 is further provided on the P table 2 and information for manual correction is displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

  Next, referring to FIG. 30, a command to start communication is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication start request command notifies the P base 2 of the start of communication. Further, the P base 2 clears the recovery information.

  The specific data of this communication start request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication start request, and is “0x04” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31, a response of a communication start response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication start response notifies the CU 3 that communication has started normally.

  The specific data of the communication start response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication start response, and is “0x14” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a command for requesting communication termination is transmitted from CU 3 to P platform 2. The transmitted communication end request command notifies the P unit 2 of the communication end.

  The specific data of the communication end request includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication end request, and is “0x05” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 33, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication end response notifies the CU 3 that the communication has been normally completed. Further, after the notification, the CU 3 and the P stand 2 stop communication and wait for restart.

  The specific data of the communication end response includes serial number and command data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication end response, and is “0x15” as binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34, a communication test request command is transmitted from CU 3 to P unit 2. The transmitted communication test request command notifies the P unit 2 of the test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2 is not encrypted.

The specific data of this communication test request includes serial number, command, and test data data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The CU 3 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with an initial value “1”, and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code for a communication test request, and is “0x0F” as binary data in hexadecimal representation. The test data is data for testing notified to the P base 2 and is arbitrary data.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, a response of the communication test response is transmitted from P platform 2 to CU3. The response of the transmitted communication test response is to notify the test data to the CU3. Note that the test data notified to the CU 3 is not encrypted.

  The specific data of the communication test response includes serial number, command, and test data data as shown in the lower part of FIG. The serial number is a sequence number of the command and is a value from 1 to 255 (cyclic). The P base 2 counts up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission and transmits it. However, the serial number is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The command is a command code of a communication test response, and is “0x1F” as binary data in hexadecimal representation. The test data is arbitrary data that is test data notified to the CU 3.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
Next, processing executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323 and processing executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between CU3 and P stand 2 is demonstrated. A command is transmitted from CU3 (primary station) to P station 2 (secondary station), and P station 2 returns a response to CU3 in response to the command. After receiving the response, CU3 transmits the next command to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns the response to CU3 in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 36, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P unit 2 from the CU 3 to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU 3 and the P base 2 at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, the P platform 2 hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2 to the CU 3 at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2 can finely notify the CU 3 of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P platform 2. It is also possible to match with

  The transmission of the business message is a command / response system in which CU3 is the primary station and P station 2 is the secondary station. The command / response is transmitted and received at a constant cycle (200 ms).

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU3 side will be described. If the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3 transmits a command to the P unit 2, the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2 again. Further, if a response cannot be received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P unit 2. Resend the same command to P-unit 2 up to 14 times. If the response is not received from the P-unit 2 even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3 determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication interruption”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3 and the connector of the P base 2 are disconnected, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2 is disconnected. CU3 does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, processing when a communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2 side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 returns a response to the CU 3 in response to the command. After that, when the state in which the command from the CU 3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2 determines that the communication is interrupted, stops the driving of the firing motor 18 and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection can be the disconnection of the connector of CU3 and the connector of P base 2, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of CU3, as described in FIG.

  It should be noted that the command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2 side do not include the communication end request / communication end response command and response.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the processing of the connection sequence at power-on will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 39 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU 3 is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, communication is started after the firing motor 18 is stopped on the P stand 2 to stop the game. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to transmit recovery information.

  In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ).

  This recovery information includes the last last transmission serial number, the last inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time. 26 is exactly the various data shown in FIG. 26, and “recovery information” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls. 27 is exactly the various data shown in FIG. 27, and “recovery data” transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. . When the card is not yet inserted into CU3 when the power is turned on, the CU
The card ID = 0 and the card insertion time = 0 on both the 3 side and the P stand 2 side.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information, and latest game information. 29 is exactly the various data shown in FIG. 29, and “recovery data” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3 in the subsequent flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. .

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU 3 counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2 receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3 has retransmitted the command. The CU 3 backs up the serial number when the command is transmitted. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response corresponding to the received command, it increments the serial number. However, it is not counted up when the response is retransmitted. When receiving a response with the same serial number as the previously received serial number, the CU 3 determines that a communication failure has occurred and the P base 2 has retransmitted the response. The P unit 2 backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “n”. The P base 2 counts up the serial number and returns a response of the recovery response to the CU 3 as “n + 1”. Further, the CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request command to the P unit 2 with the serial number “n + 2”. The P unit 2 counts up the serial number and returns a response of the recovery detail response to the CU 3 as “n + 3”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 counts up the serial number to “n + 4”, and transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 counts up the serial number to “n + 5” and returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command of serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 backs up the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the data of the game table state. Further, the P stand 2 clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, and the number of winning prizes to zero. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response of serial number = n + 7 to the CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the response backs up the data on the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of symbol stops, the number of winning prizes, and the status of the game table based on the status information response. Note that the breakdown of the number of added balls is “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The breakdown of the number of subtraction balls is “number of fired balls”.

After that, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command of serial number = n + 8 to the P base 2, and the P base 2
Returns a response of the status information response of serial number = n + 9 to CU3. Each time the P unit 2 transmits a response of the status information response, it backs up the data and clears the counter. Further, the CU 3 backs up the data every time it receives a response of the status information response.

  With reference to FIG. 40, the process of CU3 and P stand 2 when a card is inserted is demonstrated. First, before inserting a card, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the card is inserted, the CU 3 outputs a command signal for taking the card to the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the taken card and receives the read information. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  The CU 3 is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is because whether or not the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or the ball server 801 is inquired for authentication such as holding ball, storage ball, card balance, etc. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312 and the display on the display 54 on the P platform 2 side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3 does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312, the status information request including the serial number = n + 2 and the card insertion state = OFF is issued. A command is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 3 and game prohibition to the CU3. The display 54 on the P platform 2 side is controlled by the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 4, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171 and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 5 to the CU3. Also in CU3, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of the CU control unit 323.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 6 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2 to notify the P unit 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7 and the game permission to the CU 3.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 8 and card insertion status = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 sends a response of status information response including serial number = n + 9 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, processing when depositing into the inserted card will be described. The inserted card is a general 0 yen 0 card (stock card with a balance of 0 yen and 0 coins) stocked in advance in the CU. In the present embodiment, a card is shown as an example of a recording medium stocked in advance in the CU, but IC coins may be used instead of the card.

First, before the deposit operation, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P machine 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the game prohibition to the CU3.

  The player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 and performs a deposit operation. When a deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 writes the amount of money deposited by the card reader / writer on a card stocked in advance and the card reader / writer reads information recorded on the card on which the amount is written. Processing is executed.

  When the deposit operation is performed, the CU 3 transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + 2, a card ID, and a card insertion time to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 backs up the received card ID and card insertion time data, and returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 3 to the CU 3.

  In response to this, the CU 3 sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P base 2 to notify the P base 2 of the card insertion status. The P table 2 receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5 and the game permission to the CU 3. As a result, the game is permitted. Thereafter, the game is made possible by securing a game ball using the balance of the card.

  While the card is being inserted, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and card insertion state = ON to P-unit 2, and P-unit 2 returns a response of status information response including serial number = n + 7 and game permission. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. That is, a process when the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is consumed will be described. In the process of FIG. 42, the current number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, CU3 lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen, and the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. Back up your data. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU 3 alone when the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54 is displayed that 125 balls are withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of addition balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a process when the number of game balls decreases on the P-unit 2 side when an addition request occurs will be described. That is, when there is a game ball addition request from the CU 3, processing when the number of game balls is reduced by firing balls on the P stand 3 side will be described.

  As already described, when a ball lending operation or a replay operation is detected, a request for adding game balls is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit side adds and updates the number of game balls in response to the request. At the same time, the game ball addition result is OK, and the number of game balls after the addition update is returned to the CU.

  However, as shown in FIG. 43, when a ball is fired on the P platform side (three shots in the example) before a ball lending operation or the like is detected and a game ball addition request is generated, The number of game balls after being updated with the addition request amount and the decrease in the number of game balls due to the ball launch is returned to the CU. That is, in FIG. 43, in response to the status information request for requesting the number of additional balls = 125, the number of game balls = 172 updated with the number of additional requests = 125 and the number of fired consumption = 3 Reply from the stand to the CU. For this reason, compared with the case where the state information response for notifying the increase in the number of game balls due to the addition request and the state information response for notifying the decrease in the number of game balls due to the ball launch are separately returned to the CU. Thus, the communication efficiency between the CU-P units can be increased.

  The sequence will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. First, in the process of FIG. 43, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) for pressing the ball lending button (lending button) 321 once, the CU 3 confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen at that stage and also determines the number of game balls. Data of = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up.

  Alternatively, even when the player performs an operation of pressing the replay button once (or the ball payout button if a dedicated ball withdrawal button is provided), at that stage, the CU 3 Alternatively, the consumption of holding balls is confirmed, and the data of the number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up.

  As described above, the balance, the storage ball or the consumption of the ball is determined on the CU3 side alone when the operation is performed. Thereafter, CU3 is in the display of addition. In other words, the CU 3 displays on the display 54 that 125 balls are being deducted from the balance and being added to the game balls.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of addition balls = 125 to the P unit 2. The P platform 2 fires three balls from when the response of the status information response with the serial number = n + 1 is returned to the CU 3 until the command with the status information request with the serial number = n + 2 is received. In response to this, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of added balls) −3 (number of shot balls) = 172, and serial number = n + 3. A response of the state information response including the number of balls = 172, the number of subtraction balls = 3, and the game ball addition result = OK is returned to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2 and backs up the data of the number = n + 4 and the number of game balls = 172 (175-3).

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the process of replaying after paying out and paying out balls will be described. In FIG. 44, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. The replay process in FIG. 39 is similar to the process at the time of consumption of the balance shown in FIG. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, when the player presses the replay button 319 in a state where there is a ball or a storage ball, the CU 3 confirms the consumption of 125 balls from the ball or the storage ball, updates the number of game balls, Data of number = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175 is backed up. In this way, the consumption of the holding balls or the stored balls is determined by the CU 3 alone when the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button. In addition, a holding ball payout button may be provided in CU3, and the holding ball payout button may be pressed to convert from a holding ball (a point) to a game ball (a game point).

  Thereafter, the CU 3 displays the addition of the game balls, and transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of added balls = 125 to the P unit 2. In response, P 2 updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, serial number = n + 3, number of additional balls = 175, game balls. A response of the status information response including the addition result = OK is returned to CU3.

  Note that CU3 indicates that the game ball is being added by displaying on the display 54 that 125 balls are being dropped from the holding ball or the stored ball and being added to the game ball.

  Thereafter, CU3 sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and game ball addition request = OFF to P unit 2, and P unit 2 returns a status information response including serial number = n + 5 and the number of additional balls = 175. A response is returned to CU3.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 45, the number of possessed balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 800, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the count button 28 once to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. This single press is a short press of less than 1 second, and is different from a long press of 1 second or more described in FIG. 46 described later. When the counting button 28 is pressed, the payout control unit 171 of the P platform 2 measures the pressing time, and determines whether the pressing is short for less than 1 second or long pressing for 1 second or more. “Pressing the“ count ”button once” in FIG. 45 indicates a case where the payout control unit 171 determines that the short press is less than 1 second. In this case, 100 balls are counted and counted. Counted as a ball. When the initial number of game balls is “800”, the number of game balls is “700” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

In the operation of pressing the count button 28 once, the number of balls to be counted as the counting ball may be changed by the time during which the count button 28 is pressed shortly. For example, when the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of less than 0.5 seconds, the number of balls counted as the counting ball is 100 balls. When the count button 28 is pressed for a short time of 0.5 seconds or longer, the number of balls counted as counting balls is 400 balls. Further, when the time during which the count button 28 is pressed is a short press for 0.5 seconds or more, all of the remaining number of game balls may be counted as a count ball.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 700 and the number of counting balls = 100, so that the serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 700, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 800 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 700 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls. That is, the CU control unit 323 transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350. The display controller 350 receives the command and controls the display 54 on the P platform 2 side. As a result, the display 54 displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number of balls is decreased, while the number of balls is increased. In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display of moving the number of balls to the number of balls and various effects display.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. When the current number of game balls is “700” balls, the number of game balls is “600” balls and the count ball is “100” balls by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 600 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 600, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 700 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 600 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls. If a status information response indicating 100 counts has been received before the count display for the previous 100 balls is completed, the current count display for the previous 100 game balls is displayed continuously. 100 counts are displayed based on the status information response.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 600, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls by pressing the counting button 28 once, but it is counted by pressing the counting button 28 once. The counting balls are not limited to 100 balls. For example, a configuration in which 200 balls or 300 balls out of the number of game balls is counted and counted as a counting ball by pressing the counting button 28 once short may be used.

  Next, a process of counting and subtracting all the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the counting button 28 (an operation of continuously pressing the button for one second or more). “Pressing the“ count ”button length” in FIG. 46 indicates a case where the payout control unit 171 determines that the button has been pressed for 1 second or longer, and in this case, in one command / response period (200 ms). Of the number of game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  Immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P platform 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is long-pressing the count button 28 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Further, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 0, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 7, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response of the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (0 ball) to the number of balls (200 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 0 (game balls before update) Number) -0 (counted ball count) = 0 data is backed up.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 8 and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. The reason for counting ball reception = OFF is that the number of counting balls received in the previous response to the status information response is 0, and there is no need to notify the P stand 2 of receipt of the counting ball. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 9, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Here, a case has been described in which 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls during one command / response period (200 ms) by long pressing the count button 28. The counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) are not limited to 100 balls. For example, when the count button 28 is long pressed, the number of counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) may be 200 balls, 300 balls, and the like.

  In addition, regardless of the current number of game balls, a configuration in which all of the game balls are counted by performing an operation of long-pressing the counting button 28 for about 5 seconds (25 command / response periods) may be employed. Note that the number of game balls to be counted may be changed depending on the operation time for which the count button 28 is long pressed. That is, when the current number of game balls is large, the number of balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) is increased, and when the current number of game balls is small, the period of one command / response ( The number of counting balls counted in 200 ms) is reduced. Specifically, when the current number of gaming balls is 10,000 balls, the counting balls counted in one command / response period (200 ms) are set to 400 balls, and when the current number of gaming balls is 1000 balls, once The number of counting balls counted during the command / response period (200 ms) is 40 balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, automatic counting processing of game balls will be described. In FIG. 47, a process of automatically counting game balls when the player leaves the seat and writing them as cards in the card will be described. The number of possessed balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “500” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU preparation state = ON, and a counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

Thereafter, the player calls a clerk to interrupt the game and leave for the purpose, and the clerk operates the remote controller or the like to receive it with the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU 3 to set “separate”. . Alternatively, an IR photosensitive unit may be provided on the P table 2 so that the leaving operation processing is performed by the IR photosensitive unit of the P table 2 receiving a leaving operation signal from the remote controller. Further, in place of or in addition to the remote control operation, a leaving operation button may be provided on at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the leaving processing may be controlled by operating the leaving operation button.

  Immediately after “seating” is set, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU preparation state = OFF, counting ball reception = OFF to the P stand 2.

  The P stand 2 that has received CU ready state = OFF automatically performs a counting process to convert the number of gaming balls 500 into the number of counting balls, and the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 500 To do. Then, in order to notify the CU 3 of the number of gaming balls = 0 balls and the number of counting balls = 500 balls, a status information response including serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 500, and counting = ON Is returned to CU3. In addition, the display on the display unit 54 remains the number of game balls = 500 balls. Upon receiving the response of the status information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (500 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 500, and the number of game balls = 500 (game balls before update) Number) -500 (number of balls counted) = 0.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU preparation state = OFF, and the counting ball reception = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. At this time, the display on the display 54 is the number of game balls = 0. When the user is away from the seat, the display unit 54 does not display the number of game balls = 0, but the number of game balls before leaving (the number of game balls = 500 in this example). Ball) may be displayed. This makes it easier for other players and game hall staff to understand that they are away. Alternatively, in this case, the number of game balls may be displayed in a unique display mode (flashing, changing color, etc.) while away from the desk. This makes it easier for other players and game hall staff to understand that they are away from their seats.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 6, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3. In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including a serial number = n + 5 to the P stand 2 in order to return the card inserted into the player. In response to this, the P table 2 returns a response to the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID, and the insertion time to the CU 3 in order to notify the CU 3 of the card ID and the insertion time stored when the card is inserted. The CU3 performs a predetermined check process as to whether or not the card ID and insertion time included in the response of the card return response and the card ID and insertion time of the card itself inserted in the CU3 match. If there is, return the card. When the card is returned, the CU 3 controls to turn on the away flag of the card to be returned to turn on the away flag stored in the card, and then ejects the card. As a result, even if the player inserts a card into the POS to exchange prizes using the card, the away flag stored in the card is ON, so the POS prohibits exchange of prizes using the card, There will be no prize exchange.

  When at least one of the card ID and the insertion time does not match, the CU 3 enters a trouble mode and does not return the card, but puts the card inside. In addition, you may control so that addition update to the number of balls with the number of counting balls = 500 transmitted from the P stand 2 may not be performed at the inappropriate time. In that case, the P stand 2 transmits the card ID and the insertion time to the CU 3 together with the counting ball number = 500, and performs the above-described checking process when the Cu 3 is received. Control is performed so as not to perform addition update to the number of 500 balls.

  Note that such an improper state in which at least one of the card ID and the insertion time does not match does not necessarily occur due to fraud. For this reason, when such a trouble occurs, a store clerk intervenes to correct the game ball data to an appropriate value.

  After returning the card, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 8 and card insertion status = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 9, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  When the player finishes his job and returns, the inserted card is reinserted to cancel the “away from seat” state and to control the turn-off flag of the inserted card to OFF. Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 10 and a CU preparation state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting in progress = OFF to the CU3. And, when the player resumes the game, by carrying out a holding ball withdrawal operation to withdraw the game ball from the possession ball counted and converted at the time of leaving, or a ball lending operation and a replay operation, The sequence of FIG. 42 or FIG. 44 is executed, and the game balls on the P table 2 side are added, and the game becomes possible. Note that if the player does not return and the returned card is not inserted again after a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) in the “out of seat” state, It may be controlled so as to cancel the state of "." Also, when a player who has left the seat returns and inserts a card, control is performed so that the ball is automatically withdrawn and the number of game balls before leaving the seat is secured even if the player does not withdraw the ball. May be.

  The counting process when leaving the seat is different from the counting process (see FIGS. 45 and 46) performed when the counting button 28 is operated. Specifically, in the case of counting processing performed when the counting button 28 is operated, the number of game balls is gradually converted into the number of counting balls and the conversion process is displayed (FIG. 45, FIG. 46), the counting process at the time of leaving the seat converts all the game balls to the number of counting balls in an instant as described above, and displays the converted total number of counting balls. However, the counting process performed when the counting button 28 is operated may be the same as the counting process at the time of leaving.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the return process of a member card, a general balance card, and a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 48, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  However, in the counting display performed on the display 54, the number of game balls and the number of counting balls are not instantaneously changed to such numbers, but the game balls are gradually counted and decreased. The effect is such that the ball is gradually increased. For this reason, until the counting display is completed, the number of game balls and the number of points on display on the display 54 do not match the number of game balls and points on the memory on the CU side and the P side.

  However, instead of such control, the counting status (conversion status) of the points on the display may be synchronized with the actual data conversion processing. In this case, since the data counting process (conversion process) can be completed immediately, the counting display (conversion display) synchronized therewith also ends immediately. In this case, it may not be possible to sufficiently notify the player that the data has been counted. Therefore, while displaying the count, the display may be switched from the middle to the display “Counting is completed”. In this case, the card return operation may be validated from the stage when the display of “counting has been completed” is started.

  Immediately after the operation of long-pressing the count button 28 is performed, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P platform 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is long-pressing the count button 28 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including a serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. At that time, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 stores the data of the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed. Note that when the card is returned, the hall server 801 controls the number of balls to be recorded and discharged on the card instead of storing the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. Also good.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 9, the number of game balls = 0, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a modified example of the return processing of a membership card, a card with a general balance (a card with a remaining playpaid balance), and a card with a general possession (a card with a remaining coin) will be described. To do.

  In the present embodiment, a player's card return operation such as a membership card is valid on the condition that the counting of the number of game balls is completed and the number of game balls becomes zero. In particular, in FIG. 49, the P units are provided with a determining means for determining whether or not the number of game balls is 0, and an enabling means for enabling a card return operation based on the fact that the number of game balls is 0. A modified example will be described. That is, in this modification, it is determined whether or not the game ball is 0 on the P platform side, and when the game ball is 0, the card return is transmitted by transmitting information for validating the card return to the CU. The operation is activated.

  In FIG. 49, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “100” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “0” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. On the other hand, the P stand 2 determines whether or not the number of game balls is “0” balls, and if it is “0” balls (Y), the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 0, and the card discharge operation permission ON A response of the status information response including is returned to CU3. On the other hand, if it is not a “0” ball (N), the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the card discharge operation permission OFF to the CU 3 to prohibit the card discharge.

  The CU 3 validates the card ejection operation when receiving the response of the status information response including the card ejection operation permission ON. Thereafter, it is assumed that an operation of pressing the return button 322 by the player is detected. Then, when the CU 3 detects an operation of pressing the return button 322, it determines whether the card discharge operation permission ON is received from the P table or the card discharge operation permission OFF is received from the P table, and the card is discharged. On the condition that the operation permission ON has been received from the P unit, a card return notification command including a serial number = n + 2 is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. At that time, the CU 3 transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 stores the data of the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed. Note that when the card is returned, the hall server 801 controls the number of balls to be recorded and discharged on the card instead of storing the number of balls in association with the card ID of the card. Also good.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  As described above, the P units monitor the number of game balls, and when the number of game balls reaches 0, “game balls number = 0” and “card ejection operation” in the status information response to the status information request. Include information on “permission ON”. When receiving this information, the CU validates the card ejection operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49, when an operation of the return button is detected thereafter, the card return operation is performed in the same sequence as already described with reference to FIG. 48 in response to the operation. Executed. On the other hand, when the number of game balls is not 0, the P units do not transmit the information “number of game balls = 0” and “card discharge operation permission ON”, thereby entering a card discharge prohibited state. Also, once the number of game balls is not zero after the information of “number of game balls = 0” and “card discharge operation permission ON” is transmitted until the card return operation is detected, A status information response including the number of game balls at the time and information of “card discharge operation permission OFF” is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

  In the case of the above modification, if the number of game balls is 0, a response of a status information response including card discharge operation permission ON is returned from the P unit from the P unit, and if the number of game balls is 1 or more, P A response of a status information response including card discharge operation permission OFF is returned from the CU from the stand. However, instead of such control, when the CU detects a card return operation, the CU transmits a card return notification to the P units, and determines whether or not the P units have 0 game balls at that time. In case of 0, the card return is validated by returning a card return response to the CU. On the other hand, if it is not 0, the card return is invalidated (inhibited by sending a card return invalid response to the CU. ).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a process for prompting a counting operation when returning a membership card, a general balance card, or a general possession card will be described. In FIG. 50, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “200” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 200, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. However, since CU3 has 200 balls and is not 0 balls, CU3 prohibits the card return operation and prompts the player to perform a counting operation. "Please perform the counting operation." In this way, the display for prompting the counting operation is performed, so that the player can know the reason why the card return operation cannot be performed. The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 200, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by long-pressing the count button 28 (an operation of pressing the button for 1 second or longer). By long-pressing the count button 28, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls in one command / response period (200 ms). When the initial number of game balls is “200”, the number of game balls is “100” and the counting ball is “100” in one command / response period.

  Immediately after the operation of depressing the count button 28 for a long time, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, the P stand 2 notifies the CU 3 of the state of the number of game balls = 100 and the number of counting balls = 100, so that the serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 100, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates it to the number of balls = 100, and the number of game balls = 200 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (the number of counting balls) = 100 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In order to notify the CU 3 that the number of game balls = 0 and the number of count balls = 100, the P table 2 that is pressing the count button 28 for a long time has a serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 0, the number of count balls = 100, A response of a status information response including ON during counting = ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 200, and the number of game balls = 100 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 0.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 100 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls.

  As the count display progresses, the number of game balls on the display on the display 54 eventually becomes zero. The player confirms that the number of game balls has become 0 and releases the counting button 28. By releasing the count button 28, the operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball is completed.

  Thereafter, the player performs an operation of pressing the return button 322. The CU 3 transmits a command to notify the card return including the serial number = n + 8 to the P-unit 2 by performing an operation in which the player presses the return button 322. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 9, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . On the condition that they match, the card inserted in the card insertion / discharge slot 309 is returned to the player. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 10 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 11, the number of game balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting in progress = OFF to the CU3.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the card return operation can be finally performed through the display of converting the game ball obtained by the game into the possession ball by the player's operation. For this reason, a game ball is counted without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to a conventional game system that allows a ball counter obtained by counting the balls obtained by the game to be counted by each card counter. A new game system using data can be provided. In addition, if the conversion display of all game balls does not end, the card return operation will not be valid, so it is a system that does not allow you to accidentally leave the game machine and leave with game balls remaining The game can be reminiscent of the player, giving the player a sense of security.

  In addition, since the state in which the game balls are counted is displayed on the display device 54 on the gaming machine side, it is easy for the player sitting facing the gaming machine to see the counting state. Further, as described above, the display control unit 350 that controls the display on the gaming machine side display 54 is provided on the CU side, so that the display control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a process for automatically collecting a general card having a balance of 0 yen and a possession of 0 balls will be described. In FIG. 51, the balance specified by the inserted recording medium (member card, etc.) is “0” yen, the number of balls is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. It has become. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, no game ball = OFF, game completion = OFF, the number of game balls = 20, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls A response of a status information response including = 30 is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 20, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 30.

  Thereafter, the P platform 2 detects that the number of game balls has decreased to 0 when the player plays a game (the number of game balls = 0).

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, game ball no = ON, game completion = OFF, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 20. Reply to CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 0, the cumulative number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 20.

  After that, the P stand 2 detects that the game is completed after the number of game balls becomes zero and the floating ball (the number of balls in the game) in the game area 27 disappears. When a status information response of “game completion ON” is transmitted from the P stand 2 due to the absence of floating balls (the number of balls in the game), the CU 3 will display, for example, “Do you want to end the game?” Message may be displayed, and the player may touch the “YES” display to collect the general card.

The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 5, game ball no = ON, game completion = ON, game ball count = 0, addition ball count = 0, subtraction ball count = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 6 to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the card return response including the serial number = n + 7, the card ID held on the payout control board 17 and the card insertion time to the CU 3.

  In response, the CU 3 compares the returned card ID and card insertion time with the card ID and card insertion time stored at the time of card insertion, and determines whether or not they match. . If the card matches, the collected general cards are collected. If they do not match, an error is determined and error processing is executed. As the error processing, for example, control for prohibiting the return of the card in accordance with the return operation is performed to hold the card inside the CU 3, or the writing process to the holding card is prohibited. Furthermore, an error notification by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the hall server 801, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 8 and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2. When receiving the state information response including the card insertion state = OFF, the P base 2 clears the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17. In response to this, the P stand 2 sends a response of a state information response including serial number = n + 9, no game ball = ON, game completion = ON, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0. Reply to CU3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the jackpot process during the game will be described. In this FIG. 52, the number of balls “500” specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is all converted into game balls, and the initial number of game balls is “500”. Suppose that

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P table 2 notifies the CU 3 of the game table information, so that the serial number = n + 1, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 490, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13 The response of the response is returned to CU3. In response to the notification from the P-unit 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 490, the total number of added balls = + 3, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 13.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 3, the big hit = OFF, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 10 to the CU3. Although not shown, the CU 3 receives the notification from the P stand 2 and backs up the data of the number of game balls = 480, the total number of added balls = + 0, and the total number of subtracted balls = + 10.

  Thereafter, a big hit occurs at the P stand 2. After the big hit occurs, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 5, the big hit = ON, the number of game balls = 580, the number of added balls = 120, and the number of subtracted balls = 20 to the CU3. In response to the notification from the P stand 2, the CU 3 backs up the data of the number of game balls = 580, the total number of added balls = + 120, the total number of subtracted balls = + 20, and the number of jackpots = + 1. In addition, the current cumulative number of added balls = 123 and the current cumulative number of subtracted balls = 43.

Thereafter, the player performs a manipulation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by pressing the count button 28 once. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the current number of game balls is “580”, the number of game balls is “480” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for a status information request including serial number = n + 6 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 480 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 7, the number of gaming balls = 480, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 580 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls counted) = 480.

  Furthermore, CU3 has 100 balls by counting operation, and further, the number of balls acquired in this game (= added ball total “123” balls−subtracted ball total “40” balls, or the current number of game balls) “580” balls + current number of balls held “0” balls—number of balls held at the start of the game “500” balls) = + 80 balls are positive, so the display 312 displays a dollar box (see FIG. 77). Start. In this way, in the dollar box display, in order to match the conventional act of transferring the balls acquired by the player in this game to the dollar box and stacking the dollar box, the counting operation is performed and the holding ball is set to 0 balls or more. And it is executed when the number of balls acquired in this game becomes positive. Specifically, the dollar box display represents an image in which one dollar box shown in FIG. 77 is filled with 1000 balls, balls are filled in order from the lower dollar box, and the dollar boxes are stacked. In addition, when the player converts from a possession ball to a game ball, the dollar box display is displayed by reducing the number of balls from the dollar box by the number of balls converted to a game ball.

  Note that the dollar box display is not limited to the condition displayed when the number of possessed balls is 0 or more and the number of balls acquired in this game is positive, for example, acquired in this game The condition may be changed, such as displaying when the number of balls over 1000 balls. Also, the dollar box display may be displayed when the number of balls acquired in the current game is positive, regardless of the number of balls held. Furthermore, the means for displaying the number of balls and the number of balls acquired in the current game is not limited to the dollar box display, and the number of balls may be digitally displayed on the display 312. Further, instead of or in addition to the display 312, the display may be displayed on the display 54, or a dedicated display may be provided separately for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the subtraction process from the game balls by the counting operation during the game (particularly during ball launching) will be described. In FIG. 53, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “400” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 400, the number of balls to be counted = 0, and the counting in progress = OFF to the CU3. Since the ball is being fired, the cumulative number of subtraction balls needs to include information for subtracting the game ball by the ball launch, but in FIG. 53, the game ball is subtracted by the ball launch to simplify the explanation. The information is not shown. Of course, when the number of game balls becomes 250 balls or less, which will be described later, due to the ball firing, it goes without saying that the counting operation is not performed even if the counting button 28 is pressed.

  Thereafter, the player performs a manipulation of converting the game ball into a holding ball by pressing the count button 28 once. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the initial number of game balls is “400”, the number of game balls is “300” and the count ball is “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 300 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 300, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of game balls = 400 (game balls before update) Number) −100 (number of balls) = 300 data is backed up.

  Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Further, the player performs an operation of pressing the counting button 28 once to convert the game ball into a holding ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as count balls. Therefore, if the current number of game balls is “300” balls, pressing the count button 28 once should result in “200” balls and “100” balls. is there.

  However, the P stand 2 is in a state where the ball is continuously fired (a state where the game is continued), and the number of game balls is successively subtracted. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the counting button 28 is short-pressed or long-pressed and the timing at which the ball is fired, there is a possibility that the number of game balls is counted redundantly between the fired ball and the counting ball. Therefore, in order to avoid the possibility of such a problem, for example, when the number of game balls is 250 or less when the ball is continuously fired, control is performed so that the subsequent counting operation is not performed. To do. The P stand 2 determines a state in which the ball is continuously fired based on, for example, the input state of the touch sensor and the state of the shot ball detection switch 903.

  Therefore, when a ball is being fired during a game, if the current number of game balls is “300”, 100 balls cannot be counted even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a short time. Only, the number of game balls is “250” balls and the counting ball is “50” balls. Similarly, if the current number of game balls is “300”, even if the count button 28 is pressed once for a long time, 100 balls cannot be counted and only 50 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “250” balls. The counting balls become “50” balls. If the count button 28 is pressed for a long time, it is possible to count all because there is an intention to end the game.

  Immediately after the operation of pressing the count button 28 once is performed, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 4 and count ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 of the number of game balls = 250 and the number of counting balls = 50, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 5, the number of gaming balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 50, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Here, “the number of gaming balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 50”, as described above, the counting operation is performed so that the number of gaming balls is 250 or less because the ball is being fired. This is because it is not executed.

Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (50 balls) to the number of balls (100 balls) and updates the number of balls to 150, and the number of games balls = 300 (game balls before update) Number) -50 (
The number of balls) = 250 data is backed up.

  In response to the response of the state information response, the CU 3 performs display for counting 50 game balls in succession to the display for counting the previous 100 game balls. Further, CU3 indicates that a part of the counting operation has been invalidated, that the number of counting balls in the status information response is normally 100, “counting balls = 50” and “the number of gaming balls” = 250 "is specified. Therefore, the CU 3 displays on the display unit 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle (a part of the counting operation has been invalidated).

  The indication that the counting operation has been invalidated may be displayed at the moment of receiving a response of “number of counting balls = 50” as shown in the figure, or after all counting display is completed. It may be displayed. Or you may make it display continuously until the display of all the counts is complete | finished from the moment of receiving the response of "count ball number = 50". Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation has been invalidated in the middle may be included in the status information response.

  In this way, when the counting operation is performed during the execution of the game using the game balls and the game balls reach a predetermined number of points that are not converted any more, it is determined that the counting operation has been invalidated on the way. Therefore, the player can understand that the game balls are not counted any more.

  FIG. 53 shows an example in which an operation in which a player who is launching a ball further presses the count button 28 once to convert the game ball into a ball is detected. However, since the number of game balls is 250 in a state where balls are being fired in the game, the counting operation is invalidated even if the counting button 28 is pressed shortly for the same reason as described above.

  The CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 6 and counting ball reception = ON to the P unit 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the counting operation is invalid, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 7, the number of game balls = 250, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = ON to the CU3. . The CU 3 specifies “counting operation was detected but invalidated” based on the data “number of counting balls = 0, counting = ON”. Based on this data, the CU 3 displays on the display 54 that the counting operation has been invalidated. When the counting operation to be invalidated is detected, the data “counting ball = 0, counting = ON” is transmitted only once, and in the response of the status information response thereafter, “counting = OFF " Further, specific data (bit ON / OFF) for notifying the CU that the counting operation is invalidated to the CU may be included in the status information response.

  Here, when the ball is being fired during the game, the condition of the number of game balls for invalidating the counting operation is not limited to 250 balls or less, but the speed for counting the number of game balls, You should decide appropriately considering the speed of launching.

  As described above, when a game using a game ball is performed, the counting operation is not effective unless there are more game points than the predetermined number. The timing when the game is continued and the timing when the remaining few game balls are consumed overlap, so that the game continues even though the game balls necessary for the game have been counted as holding balls It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player's disadvantage that a game ball is completely lost and a ball cannot be shot when a big hit or the like occurs.

  Next, the abnormal system sequence will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 54, a process when the power supply is disconnected and the communication circuit is disconnected before the command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 will be described. In addition, after communication, when communication is restored, the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery, that is, when CU3 is not exchanged and P unit 2 is not exchanged (communication partner agreement after restoration). explain.

  In FIG. 54, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of added balls) −23 (number of subtraction balls) = 480.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from the stop of the operation of the CU 3 until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included. Speaking of “recovery data” transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, it is precisely the various data shown in FIG. 29.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 and the last transmission sequence number of the recovery data of the P unit 2 match n + 1, the CU3 has the latest recovery data of the P unit 2 The recovery process is performed using only the game machine information. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  A command for displaying the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process on the display unit 54 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323 to the display control unit 350, and the display control unit 350 displays the corrected number of game balls on the display unit 54. Control is performed. Control is also performed so that the number of game balls corrected by a recovery process described later is also displayed on the display unit 54. In addition, when displaying the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process, a message such as “recovered” may be displayed together. Further, the control may be performed so that the difference between the number of game balls at the time of power-off and the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process is also displayed. Furthermore, the number of game balls at the time of power-off and the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process may be controlled to be displayed simultaneously (parallel display). In the case of this parallel display, display control is performed so that the player can distinguish which is the number of game balls at the time of power-off and which is the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process. Further, display control may be performed in which the number of game balls at the time of power-off is displayed and gradually (temporally) changed to the number of game balls corrected by the recovery process. This change display control may be any one that changes in a digital display or one that changes in an analog display such as a bar graph.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2. “Recovery data clear” is to erase untransmitted data at the timing of communication start / response, and after sending untransmitted data (recovery data), it is not necessary to store the data. It is deleted at the timing of communication start / response.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and a command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU 3 will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 55, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

Thereafter, a power failure occurs at the P base 2, and the operation of the P base 2 stops. However, the game is continued until the power is cut off after the P table 2 returns the status information response response to the CU 3. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game until the power interruption occurs, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. However, since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since CU3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, it detects a communication line disconnection, and serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of additional balls) −23 (subtraction ball) Number) = 480 data is backed up.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Recovery processing is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of No. 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36. However, the difference in serial number between CU3 and P stand 2 is 2 or more (CU
If the serial number of the 3 or P unit 2 is “0”), the CU 3 and the P unit 2 do not perform the recovery process and make an error because fraud has occurred. When such an error occurs, at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 notifies that fact. At that time, the content of the notification may be displayed on at least one of the indicator 312 of the CU 3 and the indicator 54 of the P stand 2. In addition, the hall server 801 may be notified to that effect so that an error has occurred in the hall server 801. Further, the number of game balls may be corrected manually using a POS or the like with the intervention of a store clerk. Specifically, the number of game balls included in the recovery data from the P-unit 2 is displayed on the display 54, and the store clerk who sees it displays the player's card in the POS and sets the card ID of the card. The holding balls stored in the hall server 801 in association with each other are updated.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached due to the power interruption and the communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 56, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls Response of the status information response including = 23 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped.

  Further, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from when the operation of the CU 3 stops until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Neither the game machine information nor the latest game machine information is received from the P machine 2, and it is determined that the operation has stopped due to the occurrence of power failure, and the recovery process is performed. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  CU3 performs recovery processing using the previous game table information and the latest game table information of the recovery data of P table 2, and the number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) + (3 + 6) (number of additional balls) − (23 + 36) (the number of subtraction balls) = 450, the number of additional balls = + (3 + 6), and the number of subtraction balls = + (23 + 36).

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when an addition request command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached due to a power interruption or a communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

In FIG. 57, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response, P stand 2
A response of the state information response including serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since CU3 cannot stop receiving a response for 200 milliseconds after the command is transmitted because P-station 2 is stopped, CU3 retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. When the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3, the P unit 2 executes recovery processing. The number of game balls is corrected with the number of added balls, and the number of game balls is updated to 50 + 125.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. When the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 The recovery process is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response of the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which the communication partner is the same before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner after the recovery is matched).

  In FIG. 58, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives a command for requesting the state information of the CU3, and includes a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175, and a game ball addition result = OK. The response of the information response is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, in the P stand 2, the response of the status information response is returned to the CU 3, and the data of the serial number = n + 3 and the number of game balls = 175 is backed up.

Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the operation of the CU 3 starts, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P base 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 3, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. The number of game balls is added when the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 3 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3. Do not correct with the number of balls.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. If the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 3 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 Recovery processing is performed using the previous game machine information and the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the power supply is disconnected and the communication circuit is disconnected before the command is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 will be described. Note that, after communication, when communication is restored, the communication partner does not match before and after the recovery. Specifically, the case where the CU 3 has failed and replaced with a new CU 3 (communication partner mismatch after recovery) will be described. . When it is exchanged for a new CU3, the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player, and if the player wants to continue the game with the same P stand 2, the card is inserted. Insert into CU3 after replacement.

  In FIG. 59, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  In response to the response of the status information response, the CU 3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of added balls) −23 (number of subtraction balls) = 480.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from the stop of the operation of the CU 3 until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission serial number = 0 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery data of the base 2. This “last transmission sequence number = 0” indicates that the CU 3 and the P base 2 are not connected and are not in communication. That is, information indicating that the CU 3 does not communicate with the gaming machine is “final transmission sequence number = 0”.

  Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  Instead of having the card insertion time returned from the hall server 801, the hall server 801 may make a match determination. Specifically, when the card ID of the card inserted into the replaced CU 3 matches the card ID of the recovery data, the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery data are transmitted to the hall server 801, and the hall server At 801, the stored card insertion time and the card insertion time of the transmitted recovery data may be compared to determine whether they match, and control may be performed so as to return the determination result to CU3. .

  Further, the storage location such as the card insertion time is not limited to the hall server 801. For example, a card unit holder in which the CU 3 is installed may be stored. Further, when the card is ejected from the failed CU 3, it is stored in the card. You may leave it.

  These modifications are also applicable to FIGS. 61 and 63 described later. The CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when there is a power interruption and a communication circuit disconnection and a command has not reached the P unit 2 from the CU 3 will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

  In FIG. 60, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at the P base 2, and the operation of the P base 2 stops. However, the game is continued until the power is cut off after the P table 2 returns the status information response response to the CU 3. Therefore, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game until the power interruption occurs, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. However, since the P unit 2 is stopped, the CU 3 cannot receive a response for 200 milliseconds after transmitting the command, and therefore retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since CU3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, it detects a communication line disconnection, and serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 500 (number of game balls before update) +3 (number of additional balls) −23 (subtraction ball) Number) = 480 data is backed up.

  After the power failure occurs at the P base 2, for example, the P base 2 is out of order, so the P base 2 is replaced and changed from the secondary station (1) to the secondary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). However, the recovery information is not held because the P unit 2 is replaced. Therefore, the recovery information includes previous last transmission sequence number = 0, previous inserted card ID = 0, and previous card insertion time = 0.

The CU 3 that has received this recovery response determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the backed up card ID and the card insertion time. On the CU 3 side, the card ID and the card insertion time of the player's card that was playing are backed up, and do not match the previous card ID and the previous card insertion time transmitted from the P unit 2. Moreover, the transmitted serial number = 0 and CU3
Does not match with the backed up serial number = n + 2. As a result, the CU 3 determines that the P base 2 has been replaced and does not perform the recovery process. That is, the CU 3 does not transmit a recovery detail request to the P unit 2. For this reason, the recovery process of the CU 3 is manually performed using a POS with the intervention of a store clerk.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response from the P stand 2 to the CU 3 has not yet reached due to the power interruption and the communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case will be described in which communication partners are not matched before and after the restoration (communication partner mismatch after restoration) when communication is restored after the processing.

  In FIG. 61, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives the command for requesting the status information of the CU3, the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls Response of the status information response including = 23 is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped.

  Further, in the P table 2, the game table information changes depending on the game during the period from when the operation of the CU 3 stops until the communication line is detected, and the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36. Note that the P stand 2 stops the game when it detects the disconnection of the communication line with the CU 3 whose operation is stopped.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number = 0 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P machine 2 executes recovery processing based on the received recovery data, and returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response. (Recovery detailed response).

  The recovery data includes previous game table information (additional ball number = 3, subtraction ball number = 23), previous game information, latest game table information (game ball number = 450, addition ball number = 6, subtraction ball number = 36). ), The latest game information is included.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery information of the stand 2. Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  The CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = + 6, and the number of subtracted balls = + 36.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when an addition request command from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not reached due to a power interruption or a communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

In FIG. 62, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, CU3
A status information request command including serial number = n is transmitted to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since CU3 cannot stop receiving a response for 200 milliseconds after the command is transmitted because P-station 2 is stopped, CU3 retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  After the power failure occurs at the P base 2, for example, the P base 2 is out of order, so the P base 2 is replaced and changed from the secondary station (1) to the secondary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). However, the recovery information is not held because the P unit 2 is replaced. Therefore, the recovery information includes previous last transmission sequence number = 0, previous inserted card ID = 0, and previous card insertion time = 0.

  The CU 3 that has received this recovery response determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the backed up card ID and the card insertion time. On the CU 3 side, the card ID and the card insertion time of the player's card that was playing are backed up, and do not match the previous card ID and the previous card insertion time transmitted from the P unit 2. Moreover, the transmitted serial number = 0 and the serial number backed up by CU3 = n + 2 do not match. As a result, the CU 3 determines that the P base 2 has been replaced and does not perform the recovery process. That is, the CU 3 does not transmit a recovery detail request to the P unit 2. For this reason, the recovery process of the CU 3 is manually performed using a POS with the intervention of a store clerk.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the response of the addition response from the P base 2 to the CU 3 has not reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection will be described. Note that a case where the communication partners do not match before and after the recovery when the communication is recovered after the processing (the communication partner mismatch after the recovery) will be described.

  In FIG. 63, the initial number of game balls is “50”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, a power failure occurs at CU3, and the operation of CU3 stops. However, the P stand 2 cannot detect that the operation of the CU 3 is stopped immediately after the power is cut off in the CU 3, and if the next command cannot be received from the CU 3 for one second or more, Can detect disconnection.

  For this reason, the P unit 2 does not know that the operation of the CU3 is stopped, receives a command for requesting the state information of the CU3, and includes a serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 175, and a game ball addition result = OK. The response of the information response is returned to CU3. However, the response of the status information response sent back to CU3 does not reach CU3 because the operation of CU3 is stopped. In addition, in the P stand 2, the response of the status information response is returned to the CU 3, and the data of the serial number = n + 3 and the number of game balls = 175 is backed up.

  After power failure occurs at CU3, for example, due to failure of CU3, CU3 is replaced and changed from primary station (1) to primary station (2). Thereafter, the power failure is restored at CU3, and CU3 starts operating. When the CU 3 starts operating, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P unit 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3. The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number = 0 and the number of additional balls shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. This determination is made based on the fact that the “last transmission sequence number” transmitted in the recovery request is 0. In the P stand 2, the CU 3 determines that the communication partners do not match, and does not correct the number of game balls with the number of added balls.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines that the CU 3 has been exchanged due to the last transmission sequence number of the CU being backed up = 0, and receives the card ID and the recovery response received from the recovery response. The CU 3 compares the card ID of the recovery information of the stand 2. Further, since the CU 3 has been exchanged, the insertion time of the card inserted into the CU 3 before the exchange is not stored. On the other hand, the hall server 801 stores the card ID, the card insertion time, and the chip information of the P table 2 that are transmitted from the CU 3 in association with each other. Therefore, the CU 3 sends the chip information (main chip ID and payout chip ID) received from the P platform 2 in the authentication sequence to the hall server 801, and returns the card insertion time stored in association with it from the hall server 801. do that for me. The CU 3 compares the returned card insertion time with the card insertion time of the recovery data of the P base 2 and determines whether or not they match. If the card inserted in the CU3 before the exchange is discharged to the player and the player inserts the card into the CU3 after the exchange in order to continue playing on the same P stand 2, A determination is made that there is. When a card different from the card inserted into the CU 3 before replacement is inserted into the CU 3 after replacement, a mismatch determination is made.

  CU3 has the same card ID and the same card insertion time, and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = 0 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number of recovery data of P unit 2 = n + 3. If the last transmission serial number is “0”, the recovery process is performed using only the latest gaming machine information of the recovery data of the P machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a communication start request (recovery clear ON) command to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P unit 2 clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2 returns a response to the communication start response to the CU3. In response, CU3 clears the recovery data. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Here, a case where a replay button for starting a game by paying out a stored ball has been described has been described, but the same operation is performed when a ball paying button for starting a game by paying out a ball is pressed.

  Next, an abnormal system sequence will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in particular, a description will be given of processing when a command for requesting addition from the CU 3 to the P unit 2 has not yet reached due to power interruption or communication circuit disconnection.

  FIG. 64 shows an abnormal system sequence in the case where a power failure occurs at P machines before the game ball addition request transmitted from the CU reaches the P machine side, and then the power interruption is restored. In this abnormal sequence, a description will be given of a case where communication partners match before and after recovery when communication is recovered (communication partner match after recovery). For this reason, in this abnormal system sequence, neither the CU nor the P base is exchanged.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the pressing of the replay button is detected, the CU side confirms the consumption of the stored balls, adds the number of game balls by that amount (+125), and adds the number of balls = 125. The status information request including the game ball addition request is transmitted to the P units. However, before the status information request reaches the P units, the power supply is temporarily cut off on the P unit side. For this reason, the status information request including the game ball addition request does not reach the P units.

  Thereafter, when the power interruption is restored, the recovery request and the recovery response are exchanged through the authentication sequence as described above, and the recovery detail request is transmitted from the CU side. This detailed recovery request includes the number of added balls of the game ball addition request that has not been reached = 125. P units are included in the recovery details request because their communication partners match, the final transmission sequence number included in the recovery request is n + 2 (CU sequence number), and the P unit sequence number stored on the P unit side is n + 1. The number of game balls is corrected to 50 + 125 using the added number of balls = 125 as correction data. As a result, the number of game balls stored on the CU side matches the number of game balls stored on the P table side.

  Thereafter, a recovery detail response is returned from the P platform to the CU. Then, it is determined that the card ID and the insertion time match on the CU side, and the serial numbers of the CU and the P unit match, and recovery is performed.

  In this way, even when information indicating a change in the number of game balls is transmitted from the CU to the P units and the power is cut off before the information arrives, the game on the P unit side is performed by the recovery process at the time of power-off recovery. Since the number of balls is corrected, it is possible to maintain the consistency of the game ball data between the CU and the P units even after recovery from power failure.

  The sequence will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. In FIG. 64, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the replay button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of the stored ball, transmits a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, game ball addition request = ON, number of added balls = 125 balls to P stand 2, and stores the ball as a game ball. Notify the converted information. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  However, after the player presses the replay button and before receiving the command for requesting the state information, the P stand 2 is turned off and stops operating. Therefore, the P base 2 cannot receive the status information request command from the CU 3.

  Since CU3 cannot stop receiving a response for 200 milliseconds after the command is transmitted because P-station 2 is stopped, CU3 retransmits the command up to 14 times as shown in FIG. Since the CU 3 cannot receive a response even if the command is retransmitted, the CU 3 detects the disconnection of the communication line.

  Thereafter, the power failure is restored at the P base 2, and the P base 2 starts operating. When the P table 2 starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3 and the P table 2, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P table 2 to the CU 3. The The CU 3 transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3 transmits a recovery request to the P unit 2. That is, the CU 3 requests the P unit 2 to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P base 2 returns the recovery information backed up in the P base 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response based on the received recovery request command (recovery response). ). This recovery information includes the previous last transmission sequence number = n + 1, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time shown in FIG.

  Upon receiving the recovery response, the CU 3 determines whether or not the previously inserted card ID and the previous card insertion time of the recovery information match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. The CU 3 transmits a recovery detail request to the P unit 2 when the card ID and the card insertion time match. That is, the CU 3 transmits the recovery data to the P unit 2. This recovery data includes the last last transmission sequence number = n + 2 and the number of additional balls = 125 shown in FIG.

  In response to this, the P-unit 2 determines whether or not the communication partner before the power cut-off matches the communication partner after the power-off recovery. When the communication partner is the same and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 1 is smaller (older) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 2 of the recovery data of CU3, the P unit 2 executes recovery processing. The number of game balls is corrected with the number of added balls, and the number of game balls is updated to 50 + 125.

  Further, the P unit 2 returns the recovery data backed up inside the P unit 2 (specifically, the payout control board 17) to the CU 3 as a response (recovery detailed response).

  This recovery data includes previous game table information, previous game information, latest game table information (number of game balls = 175), and latest game information.

  The CU 3 that has received this detailed recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the data consistency between the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  Specifically, the CU 3 determines whether or not the card ID and the card insertion time of the recovery information of the P base 2 received by the recovery response match the stored card ID and the card insertion time. When the card ID and the card insertion time match and the last transmission sequence number being backed up = n + 2 is larger (newer) than the last transmission sequence number = n + 1 of the recovery data of the P unit 2, the CU3 The recovery process is performed using only the latest game machine information of the recovery data of the machine 2. CU3 performs the recovery process and sets the number of game balls = 175. However, if the difference between the serial numbers of CU3 and P base 2 is 2 or more (except when the serial number of CU3 or P base 2 is “0”), CU3 and P base 2 are treated as having been illegal. Do not perform an error.

Note that, in the communication disabled state, the gaming point changes on the gaming device side, and the change of the gaming point on the gaming device side is transmitted to the gaming machine by the restoration process, and the gaming point is updated (corrected) on the gaming machine side. A specific example of this case is shown in FIG. According to FIG. 64, “the game device is restored from a communication incapable state where communication with the game device cannot be performed, and the restoration processing for restoring the consistency of game points with the game device is performed. The game device includes a recovery processing unit that performs a change amount of the game point specified by the specifying unit during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until a recovery process is executed by the gaming device. When the restoration process is performed, the gaming device stores a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication time non-communication means when the restoration process is performed. “Transmit identifiable cumulative update information to the gaming device” is disclosed.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 54 to 64, as a correction mode at the time of recovery processing, the CU 3 compares the last transmission serial number received from the P base 2 with the stored P base 2 final transmission serial number. If the last transmission sequence number received from P table 2 is larger than the stored P table 2 last transmission sequence number, the number of game balls is corrected using both the latest game table information and the previous game table information. There is a first correction mode. The other correction mode is that the CU 3 compares the last transmission sequence number received from the P unit 2 with the stored P unit final transmission sequence number, and the last transmission sequence number received from the P unit 2 is stored. There is a second correction mode in which the number of game balls is corrected only with the latest game table information if the sequence number is equal to or smaller than the P number last transmission sequence number. Furthermore, the correction mode during the recovery process includes a mode in which no correction is performed (see FIGS. 60 and 62). In other words, "determining the correction mode" means not only determining whether to correct using only the latest gaming machine information or using both the latest gaming machine information and the previous gaming machine information, but also not correcting It is a concept that encompasses decisions.

  In addition, the first correction mode specifically adds the number of balls added in the latest game table information and the number of balls added in the previous game table information to the number of game balls stored in the CU 3, and the latest game The number of balls subtracted from the table information and the number of balls subtracted from the previous game table information are subtracted to correct the number of game balls calculated. Specifically, the second correction mode was calculated by adding the number of balls added in the latest game table information to the number of game balls stored in CU3 and subtracting the number of balls subtracted in the latest game table information. Correct to the number of game balls.

  Next, the abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, the processing when the game ball addition result is abnormal at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout will be described.

  In FIG. 65, the initial number of game balls is “50” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = ON, number of adding balls = 125 balls to P stand 2,・ Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175.

  Thereafter, an abnormality occurs in the process of adding game balls on the P platform 2. Therefore, upon receiving the command for requesting the state information of CU3, the P stand 2 receives a state information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = NG. A response is returned to CU3.

The CU 3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = NG resends the command of the status information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of added balls = 125 balls to the P unit 2. . Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

  However, the P stand 2 remains in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, the P table 2 receives the command of the retransmitted status information request from the CU 3, and receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), and the status information including the game ball addition result = NG. The response of the response is returned to CU3.

  Further, the CU3 that has received the response of the state information response including the game ball addition result = NG again receives the command of the state information request including the serial number = n + 2, the game ball addition request = ON, and the number of additional balls = 125 balls. To the second retransmission. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

  P stand 2 is still in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the process of adding game balls. Therefore, the P table 2 receives the command of the retransmitted status information request from the CU 3, and receives the serial number = n + 3, the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before the game ball addition), and the status information including the game ball addition result = NG. The response of the response is returned to CU3.

  Processing for adding a game ball in the P table 2 when the CU 3 receives a response of a response of a status information response including the game ball addition result = NG from the P table 2 even if the command for requesting the state information is retransmitted twice As a result, the communication with the P platform 2 is stopped. Specifically, the CU 3 transmits a communication end request command to the P platform 2. The P platform 2 that has received the communication end request command returns a response to the communication end response to the CU 3.

  Next, an abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, processing when resending the game ball addition result at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and saving ball payout will be described.

  In FIG. 66, the initial number of game balls is “50”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 50 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player presses the possession payout button. Therefore, CU3 confirms the consumption of holding balls / storing balls, sends a command of status information request including serial number = n + 2, gaming ball addition request = ON, number of adding balls = 125 balls to P stand 2,・ Notify the information that converted the stored ball into a game ball. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 2, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of added balls) = 175. The P table 2 receives the command and updates the data so that the number of game balls = 50 (the number of game balls before update) +125 (the number of additional balls) = 175.

  After that, the P stand 2 receives the CU3 status information request command, and receives a status information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = OK. A response is returned to CU3. However, the response does not reach CU3 due to a communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command of serial number = n + 2, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2. The P unit 2 determines that the command transmitted from the CU 3 is the same command number = n + 2 and thus is a retransmitted command, and does not update the game ball number data.

  In response to the CU3 status information request command, the P table 2 sends a response of a status information response including serial number = n + 3, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before game ball addition), game ball addition result = OK. Reply to CU3 again. When the response is retransmitted to CU3, the communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3 is resolved, and the retransmitted response reaches CU3.

  The CU 3 that has received the response of the status information response including the game ball addition result = OK transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4 and the game ball addition request = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to the status information request command transmitted by CU3, the P platform 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 5 and the number of game balls = 175 to the CU3.

  Next, an abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process when the status information response from the P platform 2 has not reached the CU 3 will be described.

  FIG. 67 shows a sequence for retransmitting an unreachable state information response. In particular, FIG. 67 shows a case where the game table information (the number of game balls, etc.) has changed due to the game between the time when the status information response that has not been reached is transmitted and the time when the information is retransmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 67, the status information response of serial number = n + 1 includes information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23. This status information response does not reach the CU, and a command instructing retransmission of the status information request is transmitted from the CU side. However, during that time, the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls change due to the launch of balls or the occurrence of winnings, and the number of game balls also changes accordingly. Then, the P units do not retransmit the state information response transmitted earlier, but retransmit a new state information response taking into account the change in the gaming table information from the previous transmission to the current time. As a result, in FIG. 67, the status information response at the time of retransmission includes information of the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 26. The CU updates the number of game balls based on the retransmitted state information response.

  In this way, when the game machine information is changed at the time of retransmission of the information information response, the P machine further retransmits the previous status information response as it is, and further sends a status information response corresponding to the change in the game machine information. Instead of transmitting, one information information response including the change in the game machine information is retransmitted. For this reason, it is possible to reliably transmit the change of the game table information to the CU while improving the communication efficiency.

  The sequence will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. In FIG. 67, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3. However, the response does not reach CU3 due to a communication failure from P platform 2 to CU3.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command with the serial number = n, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n.

The P table 2 adds the number of game balls = 450, based on the game played after returning the response to the previously transmitted command until returning the response to the retransmitted command. The number of balls was 6 and the number of subtraction balls was 36. Therefore, when the response to the command that has been retransmitted is retransmitted, the P platform 2 also transmits the amount of change in game balls since the previous transmission. Specifically, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 26 to the CU3.

  Thereafter, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 1 and the number of game balls = 450 (480 + 6-36).

  Next, an abnormal sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In particular, a process of retransmitting a status information response command from the CU 3 to the P platform 2 will be described.

  FIG. 68 shows a sequence for retransmitting an unreachable status information request. In particular, FIG. 68 shows a case where game table information (the number of game balls, etc.) has changed due to a game between the transmission of the status information request that has not been reached and the retransmission of the information.

  Referring to FIG. 68, the status information request of serial number = n + 2 transmitted from the CU does not reach the P platform for some reason, and the same status information request is retransmitted from the CU after a certain time has elapsed. However, on the P platform side, after transmitting the status information response (serial number = n + 1) to the CU first, the gaming table information is successively changed by the game while waiting for the status information request from the CU. When the first status information request with serial number = n + 2 transmitted from the CU has arrived, the P device returns a status information response including game table information at that time, but in this example, serial number = n + 2 The first status information request has not reached P units. For this reason, the P machines cumulatively store the gaming machine information that changes while waiting for the status information request. Then, when the retransmitted status information request of serial number = n + 2 arrives, a status information response including the gaming machine information accumulated and stored at that time is returned to the CU.

  In this way, while the state in which the information for instructing transmission of the next gaming machine information cannot be received from the CU continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the P machine has transmitted the gaming machine information, The changing game machine information is stored cumulatively. Thereafter, the P machines transmit the accumulated game machine information at the stage where the information instructing the transmission of the game machine information has been received. For this reason, even when the communication between the CU and the P platform is temporarily interrupted, the gaming table information can be reliably collected on the CU side.

  Hereinafter, the sequence will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In FIG. 68, the initial number of game balls is “500”. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 2 to the P unit 2. At that time, the CU 3 backs up the data of the serial number = n + 2 and the number of game balls = 480 (500 + 3-23). However, the command does not reach the P base 2 due to a communication failure from the CU 3 to the P base 2.

  Since the CU 3 has not received a response for 200 ms after transmitting the status information request command of serial number = n + 2, it transmits the same command to the P unit 2 again. Since CU3 is a retransmission of the status information request command, it does not update the serial number and retransmits the status information request command with the serial number = n + 2.

The P table 2 adds the number of game balls = 450, based on the game played after returning the response to the previously transmitted command until returning the response to the retransmitted command. The number of balls was 6 and the number of subtraction balls was 36. Therefore, when the response to the retransmitted command is transmitted, the P platform 2 accumulates and transmits the number of game balls that change while waiting for the status information request command. Specifically, P stand 2 has serial number = n + 3,
A response of the state information response including the number of game balls = 450, the number of added balls = 6, and the number of subtracted balls = 36 is returned to CU3.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 to the P unit 2. At that time, CU3 backs up the data of serial number = n + 4 and number of game balls = 450 (480 + 6-36).

  The recovery processing at the time of abnormality described above is summarized as follows. If there is a difference of 2 or more between the serial numbers of the CU 3 and the P stand 2, recovery is not performed as all illegal. However, when the serial number of CU3 = 0, the CU3 is exchanged, and only the latest game machine information of the P machine 2 is recovered, and the CU 3 takes in the latest game machine information of the P machine 2. Further, recovery is not performed when the serial number of the P platform 2 is 0.

  In the case of “the serial number from the P stand 2 ≦ the storage serial number of CU3”, the recovery is performed only with the latest gaming machine information.

  In the case of “serial number from P table 2> stored serial number of CU3”, recovery is performed using the latest gaming machine information and the previous gaming machine information.

  The abnormal system sequence between the CU 3 and the P base 2 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 54 to 68. In the explanation, the operation of the abnormal sequence after “pressing the replay button” has been described, but the same operation is performed after “pressing the coin payout button”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the coin sharing process will be described. “Mobama sharing” means that the player divides and transfers the ball to another person. In FIG. 69, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “1000” balls. First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 1000, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, for example, when the player touches and specifies a ball sharing from a plurality of menus displayed on the display 54, for example, the ball sharing process occurs in the CU3. The number of balls used for holding ball sharing is 100 balls.

  However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “0”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of possession”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball. By pressing the count button 28 once, 100 balls out of the number of game balls are counted and counted as counting balls. If the initial number of game balls is “1000”, the number of game balls becomes “900” and the count ball becomes “100” by pressing the count button 28 once.

  As described above, when the number of remaining balls is less than the desired number of shared points, a predetermined notification is given, so that the player performs an operation of counting the number of game balls in order to receive a desired shared point service. Can be encouraged.

Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 900 and the number of counting balls = 100, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 900, the number of counting balls = 100, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. Upon receiving the response to the status information response, CU3 adds the counted number of balls (100 balls) to the number of balls (0 ball) and updates the number of balls to 100, and the number of balls is 1000 (pre-updated game balls) Number) -100 (count ball number) = 900 data is backed up. Further, the CU 3 receives a response of the state information response and starts display for counting 100 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of pressing the counting button 28 has not been performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 900, counting ball number = 0, counting = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of balls has reached “100”, so CU3 can secure the number of balls to be used for sharing the ball and after the ball is liquidated, the ball sharing process is completed. To do. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball to be shared (divided and transferred) from the current number of balls (1000 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323.

  By executing this ball sharing process, the visitor card in which the number of balls to be shared (divided transfer) (100 balls) is recorded is ejected from the CU3, and the player hands it over to the other party who transfers the visitor card. As a result, the coins are shared (divided and transferred).

Next, processing of the wagon service will be described with reference to FIG. The wagon service is a service in which goods such as drinks are provided to the player by consuming the ball. A player who desires a wagon service touches the display 54 to place a wagon order. Then, the order content ordered by the player is input as an infrared signal from the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU 3 to the remote controller owned by the store clerk. In place of or in addition to the order input by the remote controller, the order operation of the wagon service by the player is performed by the LAN (Local Area).
Network) or the like, and the wagon service may be performed according to the collected order contents.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. In FIG. 70, the number of held balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “30” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “60” balls.

  First, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n and counting ball reception = OFF to the P unit 2. In response to this, the P stand 2 returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 60, the number of counting balls = 0, and counting = OFF to the CU3.

  Thereafter, the player performs a wagon order by performing a touch operation as described above, so that processing of the wagon order occurs in CU3. The number of balls used for the wagon order is 70 balls.

However, as described above, since the number of possessed balls is “30”, the display control unit 350 of the CU 3 controls the display 54 to display “Please press the count button for lack of balls”. Under the control, the display unit 54 displays “Please press the counting button because of the shortage of balls”. It should be noted that the display unit 54 performs the “displaying” period shown in FIG. 70, for example, the display shown in FIG.

  In this way, when the remaining possession ball is less than the desired wagon service product amount, a predetermined notification is made, and the player is prompted to count the game balls to receive the desired wagon service. Can do.

  The player sees the indication “Please press the count button because of the shortage of balls” on the display 54, and presses the count button 28 for a short time to convert the game ball into a ball. When the count button 28 is pressed once, if there are 100 or more game balls, 100 balls are counted and counted as counting balls. For example, if the number of game balls is “160”, the counting operation counts the number of balls as “100” and the number of game balls becomes “60”. However, in this example, since the initial number of game balls is “60” balls, even if the count button 28 is pressed once, only 60 balls are counted, and the number of game balls is “0” balls, “60” balls. In this example, since it is assumed that the ball is not continuously fired when the counting button 28 is operated, the counting operation is not invalidated even if the number of game balls is less than 250.

  Immediately after an operation of briefly pressing the count button 28 once, the CU 3 transmits a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2 and count ball reception = OFF to the P base 2.

  In response to this, in order to notify the CU 3 that the number of gaming balls = 0 and the number of counting balls = 60, the P stand 2 has a serial number = n + 3, the number of gaming balls = 0, the number of counting balls = 60, and counting = A status information response including ON is returned to CU3. In response to the response of the state information response, CU3 adds the number of balls (60 balls) to the number of balls (30 balls) and updates the number of balls to 90, and the number of game balls = 60 (game balls before update) Number) −60 (the number of balls counted) = 0. Further, the CU 3 receives the response of the state information response and starts display for counting 60 game balls.

  Thereafter, the CU 3 transmits a status information request command including serial number = n + 4 and counting ball reception = ON to the P base 2. The reason why the counting ball reception = ON is to notify the P stand 2 of the reception of the counting ball in response to the response of the previous status information response. In response to this, since the operation of pressing the counting button 28 has not been performed, the P table 2 responds with a status information response including serial number = n + 5, number of gaming balls = 0, number of counting balls = 0, counting in progress = OFF. Is returned to CU3.

  As a result of the counting operation described above, the number of held balls has become “90” balls, so CU3 can secure “70” balls for the number of wagons to be used, and pay the number of held balls (to the wagon order). After subtracting 70 balls, the wagon order processing is completed. Specifically, the liquidation of this ball is a process of subtracting the ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service from the current number of balls (90 balls), and is executed by the CU control unit 323. The payment when this wagon service is performed is, for example, in the same way as with the above-mentioned share of the ball, the ball used for the wagon service (70 balls) is written on the visitor card and discharged, and the visitor card is handed over to pay. Make a payment. As another method, a method may be used in which a terminal possessed by a staff member who performs a wagon service and the CU 3 communicate with each other to move a ball (70 balls) used for the wagon service to the terminal possessed by the staff member. Furthermore, the staff member who performs the wagon service may perform some operation on the CU 3 at the time when the order item is delivered, and subtract the holding balls (70 balls) used for the wagon service based on the operation.

  Note that the CU or P stand may perform service notification control for notifying a service that can be received by the player using a holding ball such as a wagon service. In this case, when the player's possession ball is less than the score necessary for the service, the game point remains, and even if the game ball reaches the score necessary for the service by adding the game ball, It is good also as what does not alert | report the service which a person can receive.

  For example, the service notification control may be performed using a display screen by the display unit 54. More specifically, a display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” is displayed at a predetermined position on the screen, and when the player touches this, a message “Please select the type to order” is displayed. As the wagon menu, a plurality of types of menus such as “standard menu”, “drinks”, “foods”, “sweets” and the like are displayed. Further, the current number of possessed balls and the number of game balls are displayed on the screen.

  Further, when the player selects and operates one of the menus from “standard menu”, “drinks”, “foods”, and “sweets”, the corresponding product screen is displayed. For example, when the player selects “Drinks”, a message “Please select a product to order” and a plurality of products included in the drink are displayed. Each product also displays the number of balls needed when placing an order.

  However, a product that can be purchased within the range of the possession is displayed with a solid line to notify that the service can be purchased within the range of the possession. On the other hand, as a service that a player can receive by converting a game ball into a current ball with a counting button and displaying a product that can be purchased by adding the converted ball in a dotted line No notification (not shown with solid line). In addition, a product that cannot be purchased even if the game ball is converted into a possession ball is displayed with “x” on the product name.

  As a result, if the player touches the product displayed with a solid line, the ball is subtracted and the product providing service can be received. Further, if the player touches a product displayed in a broken line, a notification is made to prompt the player to count game balls. In addition, if the player touches the product indicated by ×, a notification that there is a shortage of holding balls and game balls is made.

  The display method is not limited to this, and a menu that can be purchased only with a ball, a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls including a ball and a game ball, and the number of balls including a ball and a game ball. However, any display that can distinguish menus that cannot be purchased may be used. For example, a menu that can be purchased with only balls is displayed brightly with a lamp, etc., and a menu that can be purchased with the number of balls that include balls and game balls is flashed and displayed. For menus that cannot be purchased even with the number of balls and game balls, it is possible to make the selection impossible without turning on the lamp or the like. Moreover, you may control so that the menu which cannot be purchased even with the number of balls which added the holding ball and the game ball is not displayed. Furthermore, in the case of the number of balls that cannot be purchased only with possession balls but with game balls added to the possession balls, the menu that can be purchased is displayed in a framework with a broken line. It may be displayed with a mark, or it may be controlled not to display such a menu.

<Combination of game system configurations>
As shown in FIG. 5, the game system described above is provided with the counting button 28 on the P base 2, and the holding balls are not managed by the P base 2, but are managed by the CU 3. On the other hand, the management of the gaming balls is mainly performed. P display 2 is performed, displays 54 and 312 are provided on P table 2 and CU3, display control unit 350 is provided only on CU3, and display control of displays 54 and 312 is performed on the CU3 side. However, the gaming system according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, as another game system configuration, the counting button 28 is provided on the P stand 2, the management of the game balls and holding balls is not performed on the P stand 2, but is performed on the CU 3, and the display is provided on the P stand 2 and the CU 3. The display control unit 350 may be provided only on the P base 2 and display control of the display may be performed on the P base 2 side. Many other combinations of gaming system configurations exist. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a combination example of the configuration of such a gaming system.

  The configuration of the game system shown in FIG. 8, and the configuration of another game system described above is the combination No. 1 shown in FIG. 2. In FIG. 71, 63 combinations of game system configurations are described. However, no. 23 to No. No. 41, no. 44 to No. Combinations up to 62 are no. 2 to No. Since the column of the counting buttons of up to 20 combinations can be replaced with CU and P units, the description is omitted.

  It should be noted that the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball and management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P platform is, in part, the storage of the ball data. . For example, in the case of a gaming system in which the holding balls are stored only by the CU and the gaming balls are stored only by the P units, the management of the holding balls is the CU and the management of the gaming balls is the P unit.

  Alternatively, the significance of whether the ball management (management of the ball, management of the game ball) is performed by the CU or the P stand is that the ball data is stored in both the CU and the P stand, When there is a difference between the two data, which data is used to correct the data. For example, in the case of the gaming system shown in FIG. 8, the game balls are stored in both the CU and the P units, but if there is a difference between the two data, the game is based on the data on the P unit side. Correct the ball. In this case, the management of game balls is P units.

  In FIG. 71, all possible combinations are listed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and unnecessary combinations may be deleted according to the technical idea disclosed in the present embodiment. For example, in the case where it is a technical idea that the CU 3 needs to display and control the game balls, the “display control” field is limited to “CU” only.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the content of the holding ball and the game ball are made different from each other, but they may be made into one common value data without being distinguished from each other. For example, common value data is specified by the card itself, the common value data is withdrawn and transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2, and the P unit 2 that receives it stores it as common value data, and the progress of the game The common value data may be updated according to the control, and the finally updated common value data may be recorded on the card and discharged at the end of the game. The “common value data”, “mochitama”, and “game ball” are collectively referred to as “score”.

<Example of processing of game system>
Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart for explaining processing of the gaming system when there are a predetermined number or more of game balls. With reference to FIG. 72, the process of the payout control unit 171 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more and the process of the CU control unit 323 when the number of game balls is a predetermined number or more will be described.

  In the process when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, first, the payout control unit 171 checks the current number of game balls of the P unit 2 (step S481). Specifically, the payout control unit 171 reads the current number of game balls stored in the RAM mounted on the P-side payout control board 17.

  Next, the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred during the game (step S482). When a big hit occurs during a game, the number of game balls tends to exceed a predetermined number, and the player may feel inconvenience if the counting operation is prompted each time or the game ball is stopped firing. Conceivable. Therefore, when the payout control unit 171 determines that a big hit has occurred in the game (step S482: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

The payout control unit 171 determines that no big hit has occurred during the game (step S4).
82: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of confirmed game balls is more than 3000 balls which is the reference value of the full tank state (step S483). If the payout control unit 171 determines that there are more than 3000 confirmed game balls (step S483: YES), the payout control unit 171 transmits the game ball excess information to the CU control unit 323 (step S484). When the payout control unit 171 determines that the confirmed game balls are 3000 balls or less (step S483: NO), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives the game ball excess information from the payout control unit 171 (step S488), the display unit 54 displays “The game ball is full. Please perform the count operation.” Is displayed (step S489).

  In this way, if the number of game balls is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, predetermined notification control is performed, and this makes it possible to simulate a system similar to the conventional game system that notifies when the ball is full on the plate. It is possible to provide a system that can be reproduced and is familiar to players who are accustomed to the conventional game system.

  In addition, when using data game balls instead of actual game balls as in this system, there is no inconvenience of being overwhelmed with a large amount of balls, so there is no upper limit on the number of game balls. You may do it. However, if no upper limit is set, the player and the game store when the game ball data is lost due to troubles in the P units when the player has acquired a very large number of game balls. The problem between and becomes greater. Therefore, as in this embodiment, an upper limit value is provided for the number of game balls in the form of a full tank, and when the number of game balls reaches the upper limit value, counting is promoted and converted into points, P units It is possible to prevent the amusement store's compensation amount from becoming too large in the event that trouble occurs and the game ball data is lost. In other words, by converting the number of game balls into the number of points according to the counting operation and storing it in the CU3, it is possible to store the converted number of points in the hall server via the CU3. Even if a trouble occurs, it is easy to ensure compensation to the player by the number of points stored in the hall server.

  The payout control unit 171 determines whether or not the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after performing the display for prompting the count operation (step S485). If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: YES), the payout control unit 171 ends without performing the subsequent processing. (return). It should be noted that when the notification such as a display prompting the counting operation is terminated, for example, when the counting button 28 is depressed, the full tank state is indicated. When the problem is solved, a predetermined fixed period of time has passed, or a combination of these may be used. When the counting button 28 is pushed down, the determination is made by the P stand 2 when the full state is eliminated, and the determination is made by the CU 3 when a predetermined fixed period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the determinations may be made on either the CU3 side or the P stand 2 side.

  If the payout control unit 171 determines that the player has not pressed the count button 28 within 10 seconds after the display for prompting the count operation (step S485: NO), the game control unit 171 stops the play of the game ball. That is, the payout control unit 171 stops the launching of the game ball by stopping the firing motor 18 via the firing control board 31 because the player does not perform the counting operation even after 10 seconds have passed since the counting operation is prompted. In this way, if the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number and the counting operation is not performed, the game is disabled and the player can be prompted to perform the counting operation.

The payout control unit 171 transmits to the CU control unit 323 that the game ball has been stopped because the counting operation is not performed even after 10 seconds have elapsed since the prompting of the counting operation, as the stop shooting information when the game ball is exceeded (Step 321). S487). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  When the CU control unit 323 receives from the payout control unit 171 the launch stop information when the game ball is exceeded (step S490), the display 54 displays “The game ball is full. ”Is displayed indicating that the launch has been stopped due to an excess of game balls (step S491). Thereafter, the payout control unit 171 ends the processing (return).

  As described above, the gaming system prompts the player to perform a counting operation when the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, so that a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full is simulated. A system that can be reproduced and that is familiar to players who are accustomed to conventional gaming systems can be provided.

  FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing the relationship between P game boards and the front frame 6 (game frame) for fraud detection processing. Referring to FIG. 73, pachinko machine (P machine) 2 includes a game board 26 and a front frame 6 (game frame).

  The game board 26 includes the main control board 16, and the front frame 6 (game frame) includes the payout control board 17. The payout control board 17 requests information from the main control board 16. On the other hand, the main control board 16 transmits to the payout control board 17 winning opening information, the number of rounds, and the main control chip ID, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The card unit 3 (CU3) includes a CU control unit 323 and a security board 325.

  The security board 325 makes a gaming machine chip information request, and in response to this request, the payout control board 17 transmits the main control chip ID, the payout control chip ID, etc. to the security board 325 as a response. The security board 325 transmits the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID to the CU control unit 323.

  The CU control unit 323 transmits the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID to the hall server 801 and the key management server 800, and is a regular one in which these main control chip ID and payout control chip ID are registered. Have them check whether or not. When the P machine 2 manufactured by the gaming machine maker is shipped to the game hall, the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID of the P machine 2 are transmitted from the gaming machine maker to the key management server 800 for registration. Therefore, when the main control chip and the payout control chip of the P table 2 carried into the game hall are regular ones shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer, the CU control unit 323 sends the main control chip to the key management server 800. When the ID and the payout control chip ID are transmitted for verification, a reply indicating that the information has been registered is returned. However, if the main control chip or the payout control chip is illegally modified, a reply indicating that the main control chip or the payout control chip is not registered and is inappropriate is returned from the key management server 800.

  The CU control unit 323 enables a game by the P unit 2 on the condition that an appropriate answer is returned, but when the incorrect answer is returned, the P unit 2 is reset. It waits for reset to wait.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining information transmitted from the main control board 16 in response to an information request from the payout control board 17 in order to perform fraud detection processing. Referring to FIG. 73, information to be transmitted includes (a) winning a prize opening information, (b) round number information, and (c) main control chip ID information.

First, regarding (a) winning opening information, information on the type of winning opening and the number of winning balls from the winning opening (the value of the number of game balls added at the time of winning the winning opening) is transmitted. The reason why such information is transmitted is to prevent the number of prize balls from being changed due to an illegal act so that the number of prize balls exceeding the normal number of prize balls is not paid out.

  For example, with respect to the start winning opening, there are start winning openings 1 to 3, and when one game ball is won in each starting winning opening, 3 balls are paid out as the number of winning balls, respectively.

  Similarly to the start winning opening, the normal winning openings 1 to 3 exist, and when one game ball is won in the normal winning opening, 5 balls are paid out respectively.

  Furthermore, there is only one winning prize opening, and when one game ball wins a prize winning opening, 15 balls are paid out as the number of winning balls.

  The winning award information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16.

  Next, regarding (b) round number information, there is a limit to the number of times that a big winning opening is opened at a normal jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds is 15 (15 rounds). If a big hit occurs, the number of 15 award balls is frequently sent to the payout control board 17, but for the purpose of preventing an illegal act such that this state continues even after exceeding the maximum number of rounds. Round number information is transmitted from the main control board 16.

  Next, since (c) main control chip ID information needs to be detected even when the main control board 16 itself is changed, “XXXXXXX” which is main control chip ID information is transmitted. This is sent to the payout control unit 171 to determine whether or not the game board is appropriate.

  Here, control for performing fraud detection processing using the above information will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing control of fraud detection processing at power-on. Referring to FIG. 75, when activation of P units is started by turning on power of P units, etc., in step S651, game board information (main control chip ID, winning port information, The payout control board 17 of the front frame 6 (game frame) is obtained.

  In step S652, the payout control board 17 is stored in a storage medium capable of storing stored information until the next power-on, such as the flash memory device, the hard disk device, and the backup RAM. Game board information (main control chip ID, winning opening information, round number information) is read into a RAM or the like.

  In step S653, the payout control board 17 transmits the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID transmitted when the power is turned on to the CU3 side. The CU 3 side transmits, for example, the transmitted main control chip ID and payout control chip ID to the key management server 800 for verification.

  In step S654, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on and the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17 are the same, the process proceeds to step S655, and the winning opening Information identity is determined.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is not the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S659. move on.

  Next, in step S655, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the winning opening information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the winning opening information transmitted and acquired when the power is turned on and the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17 are the same, the process proceeds to step S656, and the round number information Identity is determined.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the winning opening information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on and the winning opening information already held in the payout control board 17 are not the same, the process proceeds to step S658. Fraud detection information is transmitted to the hall server 801 and the key management server 800. At this time, error display control using an abnormality notification lamp or the like may be performed.

  Next, in step S656, the payout control board 17 determines whether or not the round number information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17.

  If the payout control board 17 determines that the round number information transmitted and obtained when the power is turned on is the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S657.

  On the other hand, if the payout control board 17 determines that the round number information transmitted and acquired when the power is turned on is not the same as the round number information already held in the payout control board 17, the process proceeds to step S658. Fraud detection information is transmitted to the hall server 801 and the key management server 800. At this time, error display control using an abnormality notification lamp or the like may be performed.

  Following the processing in step S655 and step S656, fraud detection information is transmitted from the payout control unit 171 in step S658, and the processing ends (return).

  Further, after the processing of step S654, the main control chip ID transmitted and obtained at the time of power-on in step S659 is not the same as the main control chip ID already held in the payout control board 17, A verification result as to whether or not the control chip ID has already been registered in the key management server 800 is acquired.

  The processes in steps S659 and S660 are provided for the following purposes. Usually, when a new P unit is installed, only the game board may be exchanged (board exchange) in order to reduce the normal cost. In this case, the main control chip ID of the exchanged game board is different from the main control chip ID held on the payout control board. It is necessary to prohibit transmission of fraud detection information when the main control chip ID is different due to such panel replacement.

  Accordingly, when a new game board is installed, the main control chip ID and the like are first registered in the key management server 800, so the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control board is registered in the key management server 800. The key management server 800 makes a determination as to whether or not the check is made, and sends the comparison result to the payout control board 17 via the CU3. Next, the process proceeds to S660.

  If it is determined in step S660 that the collation result is appropriate (the main control chip ID stored in the key management server 800 is the same as the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control unit 161), step S657 is performed. The process proceeds.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the collation result is not appropriate (the main control chip ID stored in the key management server 800 is the same as the main control chip ID transmitted from the main control unit 161), the process proceeds to step S670. In step S670, an abnormal time process is performed, and the process ends (return).

  Following the processing of step S656 and step S660, in step S657, the game board information (main control chip ID, winning mouth information, round number information) transmitted from the main control board 16 is held in the payout control board 17, Processing ends (return). The payout control board 17 has a storage medium such as a flash memory device, a hard disk device, and a backup RAM that can store stored information until the next power-on even when the power is turned off. The board information (main control chip ID, winning opening information, round number information) is stored and held.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing during a game. Referring to FIG. 76, in step S661, payout control board 17 obtains information on the addition counter of the main control board. Next, in step S <b> 662, the payout control board 17 reads the winning opening information held on the payout control board 17.

  In step S663, whether or not the increment amount (increasing number of game balls) of the addition counter at the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning slot information held in the payout control board 17 shown in FIG. Determine whether.

  The relationship between the winning opening information shown in FIG. 74 and the game information shown in FIG. 13 will be described. The type of winning opening and the number of winning balls shown in FIG. 74 correspond to the type information and winning ball information in FIG. 13, respectively.

  Specifically, the start winning holes 1 to 3 indicate the game type information 1 to 3 of the type information 1 to 3 in FIG. 13, respectively, and the three balls that are the number of prize balls are those of the prize ball information 1 to 3 in FIG. The game prize ball information 1 to 3 is shown respectively.

  Next, the normal winning openings 1 to 3 indicate the game type information 4 to 6 of the type information 4 to 6 in FIG. 13, respectively, and the five balls which are the number of winning balls are the game awards of the prize ball information 4 to 6 in FIG. Sphere information 4 to 6 is shown respectively.

  Further, the special winning opening indicates the game type information 7 of the type information 7 of FIG. 13, and 15 balls, which is the number of the winning balls, indicate the game prize ball information 7 of the prize ball information 7 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step S663 that the increment amount (increased number of game balls) of the addition counter at the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17, fraud detection Information is not transmitted, and the process ends (return). Specifically, when the increased number of game balls is 9, based on FIG. 74, it can be generated when 3 balls are won in the start winning port 1 or when 1 ball is simultaneously won in the start winning ports 1 to 3. It becomes.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S663 that the increase amount (increase number of game balls) of the addition counter at the polling interval cannot be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17 The process proceeds to step S664. Specifically, when the increased number of game balls is 7, based on FIG. 74, 7 balls cannot be generated by any combination.

  In step S664, fraud detection information notifying the gaming machine that some kind of fraud has been performed is transmitted to CU3, and the process ends (return). This “fraud detection information” specifically refers to “fraud detection information 1” in FIG. The CU 3 that has received the fraud detection information 1 performs abnormality notification using the abnormality notification lamp, and notifies the hall server 801 and the key management server 800 to that effect, and an abnormality has occurred in the hall server 801 and the key management server 800. This is notified.

  In S663, it is determined whether or not the increase amount (increasing number of game balls) of the addition number counter in the polling interval can be generated based on the number of winning balls in the winning opening information held in the payout control board 17. In addition, in addition to this, the information of the addition number counter transmitted from the main control unit 161 during the game may be compared with the stored round number information to determine whether or not they match. . That is, when the number of additions transmitted from the main control unit 161 continues to exceed the number of jackpot rounds (15), it is determined as abnormal.

  FIG. 77 is an example of a diagram displayed as a dollar box display on the display 312 of CU3. Referring to FIG. 77, as described in FIG. 52, the dollar box display is performed on the display 312 on the CU3 side according to the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game due to a big hit or the like.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls acquired in the current game is positive as the cumulative number of added balls minus the total number of subtracted balls. Alternatively, the number of balls acquired in the current game may be the current number of game balls + current number of balls-number of balls at the start of the game. The dollar box display may be started when the number of balls acquired in the current game becomes positive regardless of the counting operation.

  The dollar box display is not limited to the conditions displayed when the number of balls acquired in this game is positive. For example, when the number of balls acquired in this game exceeds 1000 balls The conditions may be changed, for example, displayed on the screen.

  If the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game increases, the number of empty ball boxes 621 decreases and the number of ball boxes 622 filled with game balls increases. On the other hand, if there is no big hit and the number of game balls decreases, the number of ball boxes 622 decreases and the number of empty ball boxes 621 increases. The dollar box display is not limited to the increase / decrease of the empty ball box 621 and the ball box 622. Although not shown, the dollar box display may be changed according to the change in the number of game balls. Good. Further, a ball box 622 may appear according to a change in the number of game balls.

  This dollar box display starts calculating the number of balls acquired in the current (current) game on the CU3 side at the same time as the game is started. Here, the calculation is performed on the CU3 side, but the calculation may be performed on the P stand 2 side and the result may be notified to the CU3 side.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart for explaining the operation process of the replay button 319 in FIG. Referring to FIG. 78, in step S681, when the player (user) presses down the replay button 319 in FIG. 1, processing of the replay button 319 is started.

In step S682, it is determined whether or not the counting process from game balls to holding balls is being executed. By step S682, it is prevented that the lending process by the replay button 319 for converting from the holding ball to the game ball competes with the counting process which is a process opposite to the lending process.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the counting process from game balls to holding balls is being executed, the process proceeds to step S684. In step S684, since the operation by the replay button 319 and the counting operation are in conflict, the operation of pressing the replay button 319 is invalidated, and the process ends (return). When the operation of depressing the replay button 319 is invalidated, the display of the message 54, 312 or the like may be performed such that “the operation of the replay button is invalidated because the counting process is in progress”. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S682 that the counting process from game balls to holding balls is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S683. Next, in step S683, the lending process from the holding ball to the game ball is executed by the operation of the replay button 319, and the process ends (return).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart for explaining the operation processing of the counting button. Referring to FIG. 79, in step S691, when the player (user) presses down counting button 28 in FIG. 1, the operation process of counting button 28 is started.

  In step S692, it is determined whether or not the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball (the operation process for the replay button 319) is being executed. As in step S682 of FIG. 78, this prevents the lending process by the replay button 319 for converting from the possession ball to the game ball in step S692 from competing with the counting process which is the opposite process to this lending process. Is done.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the possession ball to the game ball is being executed, the process proceeds to step S698. In step S697, since the operation by the replay button 319 and the counting operation are in conflict, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the process ends (return). When the operation of depressing the count button 28 is invalidated, the display 54, 312 or the like displays a message that “the count button operation is invalidated because the ball lending process from holding balls / storage balls is in progress”. You may do it.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S692 that the lending process from the holding ball to the game ball is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S693. Next, in step S693, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress at the time this process is being performed.

  If it is determined in step S693 that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S694, and it is further determined whether or not the minimum required number of game balls in the game is 250 balls or more. Here, the minimum required number of game balls is described as 250 balls, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the minimum required number of game balls can be arbitrarily set.

  If it is determined in step S694 that the current number of game balls is 250 balls or more, the process proceeds to step S695. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of game balls is less than 250 balls, the process proceeds to step S698. The processing in step S694 is provided because it is desirable in the system to secure the minimum required number of balls for managing the number of balls in the game.

Step S695 shows counting control in the case of a long press, but shows another example different from the control of FIG. 45 described above. In step S695, the number of game balls (number of processed balls) to be counted per second from the current number of game balls is determined. For example, if the current number of game balls is 10000 balls or more, the number of processed balls is 2500 balls. If the current number of game balls is 5000 or more and less than 10000 balls, the number of processed balls is 2000 balls. If the number of game balls is 1000 balls or more and less than 5000 balls, the number of processed balls is 1000 balls. If the current number of game balls is 200 balls or more and less than 1000 balls, the number of processed balls is 200 balls. If the number of game balls is less than 200 balls, the number of game balls is set as the current number of game balls, and the process proceeds to step S696.

  In step S696, counting processing from game balls to holding balls is executed according to the set number of processing balls. For example, if the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait until 1 second has elapsed after counting 2500 balls, and repeat the operation of counting 2500 balls when 1 second has elapsed. Repeating 6 times completes counting all balls over 5 seconds. Next, the process proceeds to step S697.

  In step S697, the control for displaying the counting operation over a plurality of times in step S696 at any time on the display unit 54 is executed in step S697 (return). If the current number of game balls is 15000 balls, wait until 1 second has elapsed after counting 2500 balls, and when 1 second has elapsed, the operation of counting 2500 balls is repeated 6 times to take 5 seconds. The state where the counting of all the balls is completed is displayed on the display 54.

  Following the processing in steps S692 and S694, in step S698, the operation of depressing the counting button is invalidated, and the processing ends (return). In step S698, the ball lending process, which is the reverse of the counting process, or the invalidation of the counting process request for the number of game balls that is less than the minimum required number of game balls that is inappropriate for the management of the number of balls being played Is provided.

  According to the above configuration, the number of counting balls counted in one counting operation differs depending on the number of gaming balls acquired by the player, so even if there are relatively many gaming balls The number of counting operations required to count all the game balls is not extremely increased, and the operability of the counting button can be improved thereby.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display of the counting operation. In the above embodiment, the number of balls to be counted for the game ball is determined by the number of times and the time for which the counting button 28 is depressed. In this modification, instead of the counting button 28, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b as shown in FIG. 80 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display 54.

  Referring to FIG. 80, a total counting button 28a and a partial counting button 28b are displayed on the left half of the screen. The all counting button 28a is a button for performing all counting processing for converting all of the number of game balls into a possession ball. On the other hand, the partial counting button 28b is a button for performing a partial counting process for converting a part of the number of game balls into a holding ball. For example, the partial counting button 28b is used when sharing a ball or using a wagon service.

  On the other hand, a numeric keypad 28c is displayed on the right half of the screen, and the numeric keypad 28c includes 0-9 numeric keys, a clear key (C), and an equal key (=). In this example, the number key, the clear key, and the equal key are used. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and keys for providing various functions can be arranged.

  The player uses the numeric keypad 28c to input the number of game balls to be counted and inputs an equal key. Thereby, the number of game balls to be counted is determined. Thereafter, by pressing the partial counting button 28b, the desired number of game balls can be converted into a possession ball. Here, the operation has been described with the operation of pressing the partial counting button 28b after inputting and confirming the game ball to be counted first using the numeric keypad 28c, but not limited thereto, after pressing the partial counting button 28b, After inputting the number of game balls to be counted, an equal key is input to start the counting process.

  If the number of game balls to be counted is erroneously input, the desired number of game balls to be converted can be input again after inputting the clear key.

  The number of game balls that have been input is displayed on the display portion at the top of the numeric keypad 28c. By confirming this display portion, the player can confirm whether or not the requested number of game balls is being input.

  In the case of adopting such a modified example, all counting operations and partial counting operations of game balls are possible, so that it is possible to count a part of balls with each counter It is possible to provide a new system using game ball data in a form close to that of the game system.

  Since the display unit 54 is controlled by the CU 3 side (see FIG. 5), a touch operation signal on the touch panel of the display unit 54 is input to the CU 3 side without passing through the P stand 2. Therefore, when the modified example as shown in FIG. 80 is adopted, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. Such a touch operation signal may be included in the status information request, for example. Further, the display as shown in FIG. 80 may be performed on the CU side display 312. Similarly in this case, it is necessary to transmit the touch operation signal of the touch panel input to the CU 3 from the CU 3 to the payout control unit 171 on the P platform side. In addition to the display unit 54 and the display unit 312, a dedicated display unit with a dedicated touch panel is provided, and the dedicated display unit for counting is controlled by controlling the dedicated display unit on the P table 2 side. The display as shown in FIG. 80 may be performed, and the touch operation signal may be directly input to the P base 2. Further, a screen as shown in FIG. 80 may be displayed on both the CU-side display 312 and the P-side display 54 according to the player's selection. Furthermore, the counting operation button may be displayed on the screen as described above while leaving the counting button 28 shown in FIG. 1, or when this modification is adopted, the counting button shown in FIG. 28 may be deleted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart for describing control of payout control unit 171 and CU control unit 323 by the radio wave sensor. Referring to FIG. 81, regarding control of payout control unit 171 by the radio wave sensor, in step S71, payout control unit 171 is notified of game board radio wave sensor detection from main control unit 161 or notification of game frame radio wave sensor detection. Determine if it has been done.

  If it is determined in step S71 that the payout control unit 171 has been notified of the game board radio wave sensor detection or the game frame radio wave sensor detection from the main control unit 161, the process proceeds to step S74.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout control unit 171 has not been notified of the game board radio wave sensor detection and the game frame radio wave sensor detection from the main control unit 161, the process proceeds to step S72, and the game board or game frame is detected. The notification of the disconnection detection of the radio wave sensor possessed by is determined.

  In step S72, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection notification or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection input has been made to the payout control unit 171 from the main control unit 161.

Here, as a method of detecting disconnection of the radio wave sensor, signal level detection of the radio wave sensor detection signal is performed. Specifically, three types of radio wave sensor detection signals are used: H level, L1 level, and L0 level. The signal level of the radio wave sensor when notification of radio wave sensor detection is made due to fraudulent action is set to H level, and the signal level of the radio wave sensor is set to L0 due to disconnection.
By setting (ground potential level) and signal level L1 (> L0) of a normal radio wave sensor, disconnection can be detected. Here, the method of notifying disconnection detection by signal level detection has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the signal levels H and L1 may be set to the same level. This eliminates the need to detect a complicated signal level, thereby reducing costs.

  Further, in the above example, the detection is performed by measuring the voltage of each signal, but it can also be detected by measuring each current.

  In step S72, if it is determined that the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection notification or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection input is made from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, the process proceeds to step S74.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection notification and the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection input are not made from the main control unit 161 to the payout control unit 171, the process proceeds to step S73.

  In step S73, it is determined by the payout control unit 171 that neither the game board radio wave sensor nor the game frame radio wave sensor has detected an illegal act, and the process ends (return).

  Following the processing of step S71 and step S72, the payout control unit 171 determines in step S74 that fraud has been detected in the game board radio wave sensor or the game frame radio wave sensor. In step S75, the process is terminated (return) by notifying the CU 3 that fraud has been detected (illegal notice).

  On the other hand, in step S76, the CU control unit 323 receives the fraud notification from the payout control unit 171 by the process in step S75, and the process proceeds to step S77.

  In step S77, the CU control unit 323 notifies the hall management computer of fraud, and the process proceeds to step S78.

  In step S78, the CU control unit 323 activates the abnormality notification lamp, and the process ends (return). By operating the abnormality notification lamp, the hall manager can check the operation status of the gaming machine that may be fraudulent in a short time and prevent fraud. .

  Next, management of security related information in the upper server (hall server) 801 and the card unit (CU) 3 will be described.

The security-related information includes, for example, authentication operation designation information including setting information such as at least a base abnormality detection setting value and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. As described above, the security-related information includes predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Further, such security related information includes numerical data indicating the version number of information for the entire security related information. Data indicating the version number of such information is updated (for example, addition update of numerical data of the version number) when any of the security-related information as described above is changed. Note that the version data of such information is not limited to the case where the security-related information is set as a whole, but for each piece of authentication operation designation information including the base abnormality detection setting value and the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. It may be set to be updated. Such security related information is stored in a security related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801, the CU 3 and the P platform 2.

  In such security-related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial values” of various information described later), and a predetermined input operation such as a keyboard provided in the upper server 801 is performed. In the means, it is possible to change (update) the data by manually inputting the data by the manager of the game hall. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security-related information in the upper server 801, the security-related information is set to “initial value” data. When manually inputting security-related information in the host server 801, for example, each gaming machine in the game hall may be manually entered for each gaming machine, or a unified threshold value may be input and set for each model. Is possible. The host server 801 may acquire and use security related information as follows. If the model information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, if the model information and the setting information of the security related information are in one-to-one correspondence, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from an upper server than the upper server 801 to be set, and the downloaded model information is stored in the upper server 801 so that the model information is one-to-one corresponding to the security. The upper server 801 may select and store the related information, and the security related information may be used. Further, such security-related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at a preset timing (for example, a regular timing) without manual input. You may do it.

  The base abnormality detection set value is data for setting the presence / absence of base abnormality detection and its constant (threshold value) when a base abnormality state is detected by the CU 3 or the P stand 2. The base abnormality detection setting value includes a low base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a low base state and a high base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a high base state.

  The low base time threshold value is in the range of 0 to 100%, and the initial value is 30%. Such a low base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and indicates “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the low base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set low base time threshold is performed, and when the low base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the low base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  As for the high base time threshold, the set value is in the range of 0 to 150%, and the initial value is 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the high base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set high base time threshold is performed, and when the high base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the high base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value sets the presence / absence of detection of an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls (the number of balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on the firing detection signal) and its constant (threshold value) at the CU3 or P stand It is data to do. The abnormal state of the subtraction balls set here is detected based on the fact that there is a game ball winning in succession for the set number of balls, even though no game balls are fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the number of winning balls that have been continuously awarded and determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value has a setting value in the range of 0 to 99 balls and an initial value of 5 balls. Such a subtractive ball abnormality detection setting value indicates “not detected” when set to 0 balls, and indicates “detected” when set to other than 0 balls. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 balls, the subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0, the subtraction ball abnormality is detected. No detection is performed.

  Such security-related information is transmitted from the higher-level server 801 to the CU3 via the CU3 at a predetermined timing, for example, when communication between the higher-level server 801 and the CU3 is established (communication connection establishment) or when a setting value of the security-related information is changed. Is transmitted to the P platform 2. However, the version number of the security-related information is managed by the upper server 801, the CU 3, and the P unit 2. When the CU 3 and the P stand 2 hold (store) the same version number information as that of the upper server 801 at the predetermined timing, the security related information is not transmitted.

  Next, a specific example of security-related information processing for managing security-related information in the upper server 801, CU3, and P-unit 2 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing processing related to security-related information in the upper server 801 and the CU3. 82, (A) shows security related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server 801 side, and (B) shows security related information processing as processing executed on the CU 3 side (CU control unit 323). An information setting process is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 82 (A), in the upper server 801, when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is started (for example, it is necessary until the setting change of the security related information is completed by S713 described later). It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined short period after the start of communication establishment (such as a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin to a standard time) (S701). In this case, when the establishment state of the communication connection is started, the host server 801 is always in an operating state, the CU 3 is turned on before the start of business hours, and the power is turned off after the end of the business hours. This means the time when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts due to the input. When it is in the communication connection establishment start state, the process proceeds to S703 to be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the communication connection establishment start state, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting is changed in the online state (S702). When the security-related information setting is changed, for example, the data setting of any one of the base abnormality detection setting value and the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value as described above is manually set (for example, manual change by an operation input of an attendant) This is the time when the security related information management process is executed after the change. Specifically, a predetermined change flag is set when the security-related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online, and when such a change flag is set in S702. It is determined that the security related information setting is being changed. Further, such a change flag is reset when it is confirmed that the setting of security related information has been changed in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 in response to the setting change of the security related information in the upper server 801. Further, such a change flag is not set when the security related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. This is because, when the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, even if the setting of the security related information is changed in the upper server 801, the security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. This is because the security-related information after the change can be transmitted to the CU 3 by proceeding from S701 to the processing after S703 described later at the start of the established state of the communication connection when the power is turned on.

In the upper server 801, the security related information setting is changed when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting the security related information is offline and when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting of the security related information is the online state. It is possible to execute in both cases. However, when the communication state between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is an online state, the security-related information after the setting change can be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. However, when the communication state is an offline state, The security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU3. In this embodiment, S702.
In this case, it is determined whether or not the setting of the security related information has been changed when the communication state with the CU 3 that is the setting target of the security related information is online.

  When the setting of security related information is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, the change flag is set and held. After the next power-on of the CU 3, the S701 is bypassed and the security is performed by the S702. It is determined that the related information setting has been changed (if the change flag is set, it is determined that the security related information setting has been changed) and is the same as when the security related information is immediately changed in the online state. By performing the process, the security related information after the change may be transmitted to the CU 3 after the next power-on of the CU 3. Further, in the upper server 801, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is online. Further, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is offline.

  The setting change of the security related information may be changed by the following method other than the change by the manual operation input as described above. Automatic setting change in which the upper server 801 sets data corresponding to the model of the P unit 2 to which the CU 3 is connected based on the received gaming machine information from among a plurality of setting data stored by itself. May be performed. Further, the upper server 801 is connected to the CU 3 by performing data communication with an external server (for example, a server provided at a gaming machine manufacturer) provided outside the game room based on the received gaming machine information. Setting data corresponding to the P machine model may be downloaded, and automatic setting change may be performed based on the setting data.

  If it is determined in S702 that the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S702 that the security-related information setting is being changed, the process proceeds to S703. On the other hand, when it is determined in S702 that it is not time to change the setting of security-related information, that is, when it is offline or when the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the conditions of S702 are not met. Since it is not necessary to transmit data related to the setting change of the security related information to the CU 3, the process is terminated.

  In S703, it is determined whether the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted (S703). Here, the first security related information version number request command is a command for requesting a response of the version number data of the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P unit 2. Specifically, in S703, it is determined whether the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted to the CU3 in a state where it is determined that the transmission timing of the security-related information is determined in S701 or S702. . Whether or not the first security-related information version number request command has been transmitted to the CU 3 is determined based on whether or not a later-described version number requested flag is set. When the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted to CU3, the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted from CU3 as a second security-related information version number request command as described below. Is transmitted to the base 2. Here, even commands having the same content are referred to as “first” if they are transmitted from the upper server 801 and “second” if they are transmitted from the CU 3.

When it is determined in S703 that the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted, a process for transmitting the first security-related information version number request command to the CU3 is performed (S704), and the process ends. To do. The transmission in S704 is performed only once, and as described above, the CU 3 that has received the first security-related information version number request command transmits it to the P unit 2 as the second security-related information version number request command. When the first security-related information version number request command is transmitted once in S704, the above-described version number requested flag is reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the security-related information version number response is received from the CU3 (S705). Here, the security-related information version number response is a response in which CU3 returns data of the version number of security-related information stored in CU3, and P-base 2 is a security-related information stored in P-base 2. There is a response that returns the data of the version number of the information via the CU3. Specifically, in S705, after it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has already been transmitted, the security-related information version number response from CU3 or the security-related information version number response from P unit 2 is CU3. It is determined whether or not the timing is received via. The security-related information version number response is first returned from the CU 3 to the upper server 801, and then the security-related information version number response from the P unit 2 is returned to the upper server 801 via the CU 3.

  If it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version number response has not been received, the process proceeds to S709 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version response has been received, the version specified by the received security-related information version response and the version stored and managed by the upper server 801 The number is compared (checked) to determine whether or not they match (S706). In the upper server 801, when the security-related information as described above is changed, data indicating the version number is updated. On the other hand, in the CU 3 and the P platform 2, when security related information is received from the upper server 801, the version number data included in the information is stored and managed as updated version number data.

  If it is determined in S706 that the version numbers match, the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P base 2 is appropriate information, and new security related information is transmitted to the CU 3 and the P base 2 Since there is no need, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S706 that the version numbers do not match, the security-related information stored in the CU3 or P table 2 is inappropriate information and is stored and held in the CU3 or P table 2 Since it is necessary to change (update) the security related information to the latest information stored and held in the host server 801, a process for transmitting the latest first security related information to the CU 3 is performed (S707). The process ends. In addition, CU3 which received this 1st security relevant information transmits it to P stand 2 as 2nd security relevant information.

  As described above, when the security-related information version numbers do not match in S706, when the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power of at least one of the CU3 and the P-unit 2 is on, When the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when at least one power source of the P base 2 is in the off state, when the power source of at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 is in the off state, the exchange in the off state is performed. When the CU3 side device or the P stand 2 side device is replaced, the security related information that is erroneous due to a communication failure when the power of at least one of the CU3 and the P stand 2 is on is stored in the on state. And when the power of at least one of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is on. Security-related information stored in the way of on-state by such's are included such as when changes to incorrect information. Here, when at least one of the CU 3 and the P base 2 is replaced, the security-related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 before the replacement and the security stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 after the replacement are stored. The version number may differ depending on the related information. Accordingly, even when such device replacement is performed, the version numbers of the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 or the P unit 2 may not match, so the upper server 801 and the CU 3 or It is necessary to match the security related information stored in the P platform 2.

  Next, timing of the response waiting time is started (S708). Here, the response waiting time is a response (security related information setting to be described later) returned from the CU 3 in response to the transmission of the first security related information (security related information for the CU) from the first transmission. Response), or response sent from P unit 2 via CU3 to the transmission of the information from the time when the second security related information (security information for P unit) is transmitted This is the time until receiving (security-related information setting response described later), timed by a predetermined software timer process, and timed out when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  The predetermined time for which the response waiting time is timed out is, for example, when the security-related information is transmitted when the CU 3 and the P base 2 are operating normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the upper server 801 is normal. To a standard time required from when the security-related information setting response is received to a predetermined margin. That is, the predetermined time for the response waiting time to time out is set to a time that allows the CU 3 and the P base 2 to operate normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the P base 2 and the upper server 801 to be recognized as normal. Has been.

  In S709, it is determined whether the response waiting time has not timed out and is in a response waiting state as a state of waiting for reception of a security-related information setting response from CU3 or P unit 2 via CU3 ( S709). When not waiting for a response, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the response is waiting, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response is received from CU3 or from P stand 2 via CU3 (S710).

  If it is determined in step S710 that the security related information setting response has been received, it is determined whether or not the security related information setting response is received for the first time. In step S713, the response waiting state is ended, and the process ends. In the case of the second time, the response waiting time measurement ends in S713. On the other hand, when it is determined in S710 that the security-related information setting response has not been received, it is determined whether or not the response waiting time for which timing has been started in S708 has timed out after a predetermined time has elapsed (S711). . If it is determined in S711 that the timeout has not occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S711 that a time-out has occurred, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in information communication, processing for blocking communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 is performed (S712), and a response is returned by S713. End the wait state.

  Note that the process of confirming the version number of the security-related information as described above and transmitting the security-related information to the CU 3 when there is a discrepancy is a regular timing in addition to the timing determined in S701 and S702 as described above. Such as a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, a predetermined period after the transition from the high base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. As described above, it may be executed at the timing when the gaming state is changed, or may be always executed.

  Further, the above-described S701 determines whether or not the communication connection to the network in the game arcade is established when the upper server 801 is turned on, and the process proceeds to S703 when the establishment is established. Thereafter, it may be determined whether or not the setting of security related information has been changed in S702. In that case, when the setting of the security related information is changed, the above-described change flag is set when the setting of the security related information is changed regardless of whether the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. When the change flag is set, the process may proceed from S702 to S703.

  When the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are always in the power-on state and are always on, the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 except when an abnormal state such as a power failure occurs. Is always established, and whenever the security-related information is changed and set in the upper server 801, the process always proceeds from S702 to S703.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82 (B), in CU3, in the security related information setting process, it is determined whether or not it is the time of receiving the first security related information version number request command from the upper server 801 ( S751). If it is determined in S751 that the first security related information version number request command is not received, the process proceeds to S755 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S751 that the first security related information version number request command is received, the version number data of the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3 is confirmed (S753). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the confirmed version number data to the upper server 801 is performed (S754), and the control shifts to S759.

  On the other hand, in S755, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 in S707 described above. If it is determined that the first security related information is not received, the control proceeds to S759. If it is determined that the first security related information is received, it is determined whether or not the security related information has already been updated in the CU 3 (S756). If the security related information received in S755 is the first time, the security related information has not yet been updated in the CU3. The received first security related information is the security related information in the CU3. It is stored (updated) in the storage unit (S757). As a result, the first security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 is stored and held in the CU3. Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to the upper server 801 as a response to the upper server 801 in response to storing the first security related information (S758).

  On the other hand, if the first security related information has already been updated in CU3, a determination of YES is made in S756, the control proceeds to S759, and the P-P security related information processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the base monitoring process is executed not only on the CU 3 but also on the P platform 2 (see FIGS. 85 and 86).

  For this reason, it is necessary to store (update and store) the security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 not only in the CU 3 but also in the P unit 2. Therefore, the information processing related to security for the P unit in S759 is executed.

  In order to determine whether or not the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 is different from that of the CU 3 and the P base 2, the version number of the security related information is transmitted from the CU 3 or from the P base 2 via the CU 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value data of the security related information is transmitted from the CU3 or the P unit 2 via the CU3. You may make it compare whether setting value data correspond. In this way, when the CU 3 or the P unit 2 is replaced, the P unit 2 of a different model is connected to the CU 3, and the set value data of the security related information is different, but the version number of the security related information is different. When the data coincides with the version number data of the security related information stored in the upper server 801, it is possible to prevent the abnormality detection from being performed with an incorrect setting value.

  Next, the specific control contents of the information processing related to the P-unit security in S759 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the CU control unit 323 of the CU 3 determines whether it is time to receive the first security related information version number request command (S760). When the first security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted from the upper server 801, the control advances to S761, where it is determined whether or not a security-related information version number response has been received. When the security related information version response has not been sent, it is determined whether or not the first security related information has been received in S762, and when the first security related information has not been sent from the upper server 801, S763. Thus, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response has been received. If no security related information setting response has been sent from the P base 2, this processing ends.

  If the first security related information version number request command is transmitted from the upper server 801 while the processes of S760 → S761 → S762 → S763 are repeatedly executed, the determination of YES is made in S751 as described above. After the processing of S753 and S754 is performed, control proceeds to S759. Then, a determination of YES is made in S760, and a process of transmitting the received first security-related information version number request command as a second security-related information version number request command to P-unit 2 is performed (S764). The second security related information version number request command is determined to be received in S770 in the P-unit security related information setting process shown in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 84, the P security related information setting process is a process executed by the payout control unit 171 of P 2 and the second security related information version number request command in S764 is P 2 If YES, the determination of YES is made in S770. Then, processing for confirming the version number data of the security related information is performed (S772). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the confirmed version number data to the CU 3 is performed (S773), and the process ends.

  If the security related information response in S773 is transmitted to CU3, YES is determined in S761 of FIG. 83, and the CU control unit 323 in CU3 transmits the received security related information version response to the upper server 801. The process to do is performed.

  The upper server 801 that has received this security-related information version number response makes a determination of YES in S705 described above, executes the processing in S706 and S707, and transmits the necessary first security-related information to the CU3. It is. In response to this, the CU control unit 323 of CU3 makes a determination of YES through S755, makes a determination of YES through S756, proceeds to S759, makes a determination of YES through S762 in FIG. 83, and receives the received first security A process of transmitting the related information as the second security related information to the P platform 2 is performed (S766).

  The payout control unit 171 of the P table 2 that has received the second security related information makes a determination of YES in S771 of FIG. 84, and performs a process of storing (updating and storing) the received security related information (S774). Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to CU3 (S775).

  The CU control unit 323 of CU3 that has received the security related information setting response makes a determination of YES in S763 of FIG. 83, and performs processing to transmit the received security related information setting response to the upper server 801 (S767). . Receiving this, the upper server 801 makes a determination of YES in S710 described above, and executes a response waiting state termination process in S713.

  Next, a base monitoring process executed by the CU 3 (CU control unit 323) in order to monitor the base based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the base monitoring process executed by CU3. The base monitoring process is executed in a state other than the big hit gaming state.

  In the base monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 171 has been received (S801). When it is determined that the game ball firing number information has been received, based on the received game ball firing number information, the number of fires counted by the firing information number counter is updated in CU3 (S802), and S803. Proceed to On the other hand, when it is determined that the shipment number information has not been received, the process proceeds to S803 without adding and updating the data of the number of shots. Thereby, in CU3, the number of discharges can be counted and managed.

  In S803, it is determined whether or not the game ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 171 has been received (S803). When it is determined that the game ball acquisition number information has been received, the acquisition number data counted by the acquisition number counter in the CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball acquisition number information (S804). move on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball acquired number information is not received, the process proceeds to S805 without adding and updating the acquired number data. Thereby, in CU3, the acquisition number can be counted and managed.

  In S805, it is determined whether or not a predetermined base calculation timing is reached (S805). In CU3, for example, in order to perform a process of calculating a base every time a predetermined time such as one minute elapses, the elapsed time is measured using a predetermined software timer after the card is inserted into CU3, and the timer is set to a predetermined time. Every time a time (for example, 1 minute) is timed out and timed out, it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come.

  If it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is not reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is reached, a process of calculating the base is performed based on the number of fires counted in S802 and the number of acquisitions counted in S804 (S806). Specifically, in S806, the base is calculated by performing an arithmetic operation using an arithmetic expression such as “acquired number / launched number × 100” (%).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (S807). In S807, for example, the current gaming state is in the high base state based on the information indicating whether or not the high base is specified by the data of the “gaming table state 2” transmitted from the P table 2 and received. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in S807 that the base state is not the high base state, that is, the base state is the low base state, the low base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value in the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3. It is set (S808), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, when it is determined in S807 that the state is the high base state, the high base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value among the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 (S809), Proceed to S810.

In S810, it is determined whether or not the base value calculated in S806 is greater than or equal to the base abnormality detection set value set in accordance with whether or not the high base state is set in S808 or S809. If it is determined in S810 that it is not equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection set value, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S810 that the base abnormality detection set value is exceeded, an error notification for notifying the occurrence of a base abnormality for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base is performed on the display 312 and card ejection is prohibited. The flag is set to ON (S811).

  By setting the card ejection prohibition flag to ON, the card ejection operation from the CU is prohibited (invalidated).

  Further, error information specifying the abnormal state is notified to the upper server 801 (S812). If it is determined as an abnormality as a result of the base abnormality monitoring in the P stand 2, an error is notified to the CU in S832, which will be described later, and the CU control unit 323 of the CU3 that receives the notification notifies the P in S813. It is determined that there has been an error notification from the stand, and the upper server 801 is notified of error information specifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base at the P stand (P stand error notification) and the card ejection prohibition flag is turned ON. It is set (S814), and the process ends. By setting the card ejection prohibition flag to ON, the card ejection operation from the CU is prohibited (invalidated).

  As error notification, instead of or in addition to that executed by the indicator 312, an abnormality notification lamp provided in the CU 3 is turned on (or flashes), or an abnormality notification is performed by voice from a speaker. You may make it let. Further, such display, light emission, and sound notification may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided in the host server 801, or a display (for example, a display) provided in the P stand 2. Etc.), a lamp, and a speaker. In addition, this error notification should not be performed where a player such as the card unit 3 or the pachinko machine 2 can be confirmed, and should be performed only at a place where only a game manager or a staff member can recognize. Also good. This error notification is not an error notification due to the fact that fraud has been surely performed, but is an error notification of the determination result that there is a possibility that an abnormality due to fraud has occurred. If error notification is given, there will be an inconvenience that a player who has not made any fraud will treat it as if he / she is working illegally. It is good to do.

  Next, the P base monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The payout control unit 171 of the P platform 2 determines whether or not a shot ball has been detected (S820). If there is no shot, the control proceeds to S822, but the shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection switch 903 is detected. If input to the payout control unit 171, a determination of YES is made in S820, and the number of fired balls is added (S821).

  Further, it is determined whether or not an additional ball has been received from the main control board 16 (S822). If an additional ball has been received, an acquisition number addition process is performed (S823). Further, the payout control unit 171 determines whether or not a foul ball has been detected (S824). If a foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, a determination of YES is made in S824 and an acquired ball is obtained. Is added (S823). Then, the control after S825 is executed. The processing in S825 to S832 is the same as the processing in S805 to S812 in FIG. However, the error notification destination is CU3 in S832 compared to S812. This is the only difference.

The error information notified in S812 and S814 includes the date and time of occurrence, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), BB serial number, main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout. Control chip information (payout chip ID) is included. The error information notified in S832 includes occurrence date and time, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), main control chip information (main chip ID), and dispensing control chip information (dispensing chip). ID). Here, the error code is information indicating a large classification error code when the error type is largely classified according to a predetermined classification standard. The error information is information indicating a small classification error code when the large classification error code is classified in detail according to a predetermined classification standard.

  Thus, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the P unit 2 is inappropriate, error information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate is received from the CU 3. Since the data is transmitted to the upper server 801, the upper server 801 can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  As described above, the base calculation timing in S805 and S825 and the abnormality detection timing in S810 and S830 are replaced with a regular timing, as described above, for a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state. It may be set at the timing when the gaming state changes, such as a predetermined period after the transition from the base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. The base may always be calculated when the process is executed.

  The CU3 (CU control unit 323) and the P base 2 (payout control unit 171) also execute a subtraction ball monitoring process for monitoring the subtraction balls based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU3 and the P base 2. Is done. In the subtraction ball monitoring process by CU3, the payout control is performed in a state in which it is determined whether or not there is a fired ball based on the game ball fired number information transmitted from the payout control unit 171 and it is determined that there is no fired ball. The winning ball detected based on the winning information transmitted from the unit 171 (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, winning ports 1 to 4) is recognized, and the winning ball is stored (held) in the CU3. )), It is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtracted balls has occurred when it is determined that the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the security-related information has been continuously won. In the subtractive ball monitoring process at the P stand 2, the payout control unit 171 recognizes whether or not there is a shot ball based on the game ball shot number information, and determines that there is no shot ball, Recognize the winning ball detected based on the start opening, the big winning opening, etc., and set the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the security related information stored (held) in the P stand 2 When it is determined that a winning is continuously made for a value (for example, 5 balls) or more, it is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtraction balls has occurred.

  Then, when it is determined that a subtraction ball abnormality has occurred, an error notification for specifying the abnormal state and an error notification are performed as in the case of the base abnormality described above.

  In addition to the above-described base abnormality and subtraction ball abnormality, the following security related information is stored in each of the upper server 801, the card unit (CU) 3 and the P stand 2, and the base abnormality and Similarly to the subtraction ball abnormality, a set value transmission process and an error monitoring process may be executed.

  Judgment that determines that the number of possessed balls is abnormal when the difference between the number of retained balls stored in the CU 3 and the number of held balls stored in the P stand 2 exceeds a set value (for example, one ball). A numerical abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

In the state where there is no winning count based on the number of game balls acquired transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the CU3, a winning is made based on the winning information (such as a start opening or a big winning port) transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the CU3. An addition ball abnormality in which the CU 3 determines that the addition ball is abnormal when a ball is detected may be used as the security-related information. In addition, when the payout control unit 171 has no winning count based on the information on the number of game balls acquired and the winning ball is detected based on the winning information (such as the start opening or the big winning opening), the P stand 2 is added. An addition ball abnormality that is determined to be an abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  Based on the game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to CU3, it is determined that CU3 is abnormal when the number of held balls stored in CU3 becomes a negative value. A minus ball abnormality may be used as the security-related information. Further, the payout control unit 171 determines that the P stand 2 is abnormal when the number of possessed balls stored in the P stand 2 becomes a negative value based on the game ball acquisition number information and the game ball firing number information. A negative ball abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  A unit that determines that CU3 is abnormal when the number of winning balls per unit time exceeds a set value based on winning information (such as a start opening or a big winning opening) transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the CU3. An abnormality in the number of winning prizes per hour may be managed as the security-related information. Further, when the payout control unit 171 determines that the number of winning prizes per unit time exceeds a set value based on the winning information, An abnormality in the number of winning balls per unit time determined to be abnormal may be managed as the security related information. In that case, as setting values, a first setting value for a big hit gaming state (for example, 50 balls / minute) and a second setting value for a non-hit gaming state (for example, 10 balls / minute) It can be managed separately.

  When the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of recovered balls transmitted from the payout control unit 171 to the CU3 becomes equal to or larger than a set value, the difference in the number of balls is determined to be abnormal as the security related information. Moreover, when the payout control unit 171 determines that the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of collected balls is equal to or greater than a set value, the difference in the number of balls is determined to be abnormal when the P-unit 2 is abnormal. It may be used as information.

  Corresponding to the probability of occurrence of jackpot, the start count is abnormal when the average start count for jackpot as the average start count required for one jackpot occurrence (variable display device fluctuation start count) falls below the set value. May be provided, and the abnormality determination value may be managed as security related information.

  Further, as the security related information, in addition to the authentication operation designation information described above, authentication control information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 and the P stand 2, and such authentication control information is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the CU 3. You may make it memorize | store and manage with P stand 2. FIG. Here, the authentication control information is predetermined setting information including threshold data related to the various types of authentication described above, and whether or not the setting information is transmitted at the same timing as the authentication operation specifying information described above. Similar to the authentication operation designation information described above, the information is only displayed when the version number stored in the upper server 801 does not match the version number stored in the CU3 or the version number stored in the P unit 2. What is necessary is just to make it transmit.

  Thus, as the security-related information, predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Then, such setting information data is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and further to the P unit 2 via the CU3, and stored in the upper server 801, the CU3 and the P unit 2, and in the CU3 and the P unit 2 This is used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate.

As the base abnormality detection setting value, a low base time threshold value used in the low base state and a high base time threshold value used in the high base state are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a big hit time threshold value used in the big hit game state is provided and transmitted from the upper server 801 in the security related information, and used for abnormality detection in the same manner as the low base time threshold value and the high base time threshold value. Also good. In this case, the base may be calculated even during the big hit gaming state, and the calculated base may be compared with the big hit threshold value to detect the base abnormality during the big hit.

  Further, based on the C-ID (card ID) inserted into the CU 3 and the game information corresponding to the C-ID, a player having a high occurrence frequency of an abnormal state such as a base abnormality is identified, and the player Security-related information so that anomaly can be determined using special security-related information in which data such as threshold values that are different from those of other players (for example, threshold values that are easier to detect abnormal states) are set. By setting the data, the setting contents of the security related information may be varied according to the occurrence frequency of the abnormal state.

  As described above, the setting information related to the security related information such as the base abnormality detection setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 and further to the P unit 2 via the CU 3, and the CU 3 and the P unit 2 store them. By monitoring the abnormality related to the security related information such as the base abnormality in the CU 3 and the P stand 2 based on the setting information, the upper server 801 can monitor the abnormality related to the security related information by itself. The processing burden can be reduced. Furthermore, since the higher-level server 801, the CU 3, and the P platform 2 share the security-related information monitoring process, it is possible to perform abnormality determination using a more detailed threshold. Even in such a case, the host server 801 only manages the set value, and the CU 3 and the P unit 2 only make an abnormality determination based on the transmitted set value, so that an increase in the processing burden on both is suppressed. be able to.

  Furthermore, in order to monitor the abnormality regarding the security related information on both the CU3 side and the gaming machine side, the following effects are produced.

  When an abnormality occurs on the gaming machine side or when an illegal act is performed, the CU 3 side can appropriately determine whether or not the gaming information sent from the gaming machine side is abnormal, and the abnormality can be detected. For example, in determining the base abnormality, even if the gaming machine side is cheated and the abnormality detection function on the gaming machine side is disabled, abnormal value base value data is transmitted from the P unit 2 to the CU 3, An abnormality can be determined on the CU3 side.

  In addition, in the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2, for example, when a fraud in which the status information request of “additional balls” as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is frequently transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2 is performed. In addition, the P unit 2 performs addition control as requested by the status information, and when the number of game balls as a result of the addition is transmitted to the CU, the number of game balls stored and managed on the CU 3 side is transmitted. Abnormality can be detected by the difference in the number of balls. In addition, in the communication between the CU 3 and the P stand 2, in the state information response transmitted from the P stand 2 to the CU 3, when an illegal operation is performed so as not to send the “subtraction ball number” shown in FIG. 52, the CU 3 An abnormality can be detected by the difference between the number of game balls stored and managed on the side and the number of game balls transmitted from the P stand 2 side.

  Further, as described above, the version number of the security related information stored in the host server 801 and the version number of the security related information stored in the CU 3 and the P unit 2 are compared (verified), and the version number is determined. Since the security related information is transmitted when they do not match, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game is continued with the stored setting of the security related information being incorrect. In addition, the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the security related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 match, and the security related information stored in the CU 3 or the P base 2 is updated. Although it is not necessary, it is possible to prevent unnecessary communication of security related information. Note that security-related information must be sent without comparing the version number at a predetermined timing, such as when the communication connection establishment start state as described above and at the time of changing the setting value of security-related information are made. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the upper management server 801 is taken as an example of a game management apparatus that manages setting information such as threshold values of security related information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, setting information such as a threshold value of security related information may be managed by a hall management computer.

  In addition, in the case of inputting threshold data of security related information in the upper server 801, instead of setting the data directly by inputting, for example, 10%, 20%, 30%. The management is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, setting 1, setting 2,...), And thresholds are associated with the setting stages (for example, setting 1: 10%, setting 2: 20%, setting 3:30). %)), For example, by inputting and setting setting stage information such as setting 1, setting 2, setting 3,..., Threshold value data is indirectly specified and stored in the upper server 801. May be.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 87, in slot machine 2S, front door 2bS is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aS with its left edge as the center of swing. Although not shown in FIG. 87, a CU is connected to the left side of the slot machine 2S in the same manner as the P units.

  In the slot machine 2S, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when playing a game in the slot machine 2S, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the slot machine 2S is not provided with a medal slot and a medal payout slot.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 2S, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 10 provided on the front door 2bS. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  A touch panel display 510 is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2bS. The display 510 is a display corresponding to the P displays 54, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) of the same type as the display 54, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510 is connected to the CU display control unit 350 in the same manner as the display unit 54 in FIG. 5 and is controlled on the CU side. The indicator 510 is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7S shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

Further, the front door 2bS has a single BET switch 5S that is operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. Number of bets (for example, RT (Re
play time) is set when setting “game point = 3”, and when bonus is set “game point = 2”), a start switch 7S operated when starting a game, a reel 2L, Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of 2C and 2R, respectively, are provided.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 2S, first, as with the P machines, after securing a game point using the adjacent CU, the number of bets is set using the game point. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals deposited in the game hall (corresponding to P stored balls). In order to use the game points, the single BET switch 5S or the MAXBET switch 6S may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510 is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7S is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7S is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously change. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 10.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, When the 2R display result is stopped, a prize is generated, a game point determined according to the prize is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510 is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 2S is provided with a counting button 28S for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 5). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display unit 510 in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted and the display 510 displays a state in which the points are increased while the game points are decreased. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3 or may be transmitted to the CU 3 as a status information response via the P unit 2 or the S unit (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be excluded is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the slot machine 2S when a start operation is detected. It corresponds to the main control unit 161 of the stand). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range on the basis of the stop operation, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. When it is determined that the main control base has won, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of the win (adds game points).

  In other words, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value by using the S units, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, which is displayed on the variable display device Before the result is derived, a predetermining unit that determines whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to be generated, and causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining unit A slot machine including derivation control means for performing control and giving means for giving a game value when the winning occurs is configured.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and their transmission / reception modes. FIG. 88 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 8 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. The description of is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the launch control board 31, and the launch motor 18 of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable that the dollar box display in the case of S units is such that a large number of medals are loaded instead of the large number of balls shown in FIG.

When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the balance of a prepaid card, a medal or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. That is, if the one-sheet BET switch 5S is operated, 1 is added to the betting number setting value and 1 is subtracted from the credit. If the MAXBET switch 6S is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510 and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored in both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units,
Alternatively, the points may be stored only on the CU side, and the other points may be stored only on the S platform side. Further, the credit excess point may be the target of the dollar box display of FIG.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming the card count. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) In the present embodiment, when an uncounted game point remains when a card return operation is performed, a message prompting the counting is displayed on the P display or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

(7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, while it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting a real ball, it can be prevented that it takes too much time to complete counting due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) During the big hit, the judgment reference value for judging that the number of game balls is full may be increased. In other words, the determination reference value for the full tank determination may be different depending on whether or not the big hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls from rapidly increasing during the big hit, and making a full tank determination immediately to stop firing.

  (9) The number of game balls when a big hit occurs is memorized. During the big hit, even if the criterion value for full tank is exceeded, the increased number of game balls allowed after the big hit has occurred If it is within a value (for example, 1000 balls), it is good also as what does not determine a full tank.

  (10) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function to turn on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and within 1 second from 1 operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (11) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first ball count is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the operation is performed. A number of balls that is larger than the first number of balls is counted according to time. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (12) “Predetermined processing” of “recording medium processing means for processing so that predetermined processing can be performed using the game points as the holding points when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” , CU processing when using a card ejected from the CU inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine (processing to withdraw the possessed ball that can be specified by the card and convert it into a gaming ball , Or shared ball processing, or wagon service processing). Alternatively, the “predetermined process” may be a process in which a prize is exchanged by receiving a card with a prize exchange machine for exchanging prizes and consuming the points specified by the card.

  Further, the above-mentioned “processing so that predetermined processing can be performed with the game point as the holding point when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected” means, for example, when a card return operation is detected In this process, the score is recorded on the card inserted in the CU so as to be specified, and the card is returned. Here, “recordably specified” means that the score is directly recorded on the card, and the card ID and score are recorded on the server connected to the CU without recording the score on the card. And a method of storing IDs and points in association with each other in the server.

(13) In the present embodiment, (A) the fact that game points of “predetermined points” or more are not stored, game points are not counted even if a counting operation is performed. Is done. In the embodiment, when (B) the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more points can be counted, and a notification to that effect is given. Is done. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (14) In the present embodiment, when the counting operation is performed during the ball firing, the counting operation is invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than the reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation has been detected. In addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating balls floating in the game area 27) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game), whether or not in game You may make it determine. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine and the counting operation during the game is invalidated is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  (15) In FIG. 72, the process proceeds to S483 on condition that no big hit has occurred (NO in S482), but the step of S482 may be deleted and the process may proceed from S481 to S483. That is, regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, when the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  Further, the steps of S486 and S487 may be deleted. That is, in FIG. 72, when the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball is forcibly stopped. It may not be performed.

  (16) Referring to FIG. 8, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (17) The display for prompting the counting operation in FIG. 50 may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return” or a counting button on the screen. The display may be such that 28 is displayed and blinks.

(18) In the present embodiment, when the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), “control for performing display for prompting counting operation on display” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is done. Here, “prompt for counting operation” is, for example, a message indicating “Please count, because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit”, or simply “Counting operation is required”. There may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (19) In the present embodiment, when a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), if there are no more game points remaining (eg, 250 points), the counting operation is performed. Not activated. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (20) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (21) When the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different according to the remaining number of game points, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (22) When counting game balls (game points) and converting points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from a speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (23) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (24) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (25) In FIG. 8 or FIG. 88, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (26) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54 may be performed on the display 312 in the same manner.

  (27) In CU3, based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side, the stored game ball number is updated. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801 (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be performed by a computer or hall server 801).

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, the high level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio sensors 163 and 173 detect radio waves. However, the radio sensors 163 and 173 Inverting amplifiers (inverters) for inverting the signals may be provided in the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 so that the signals are input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 via the inverting amplifiers. By doing so, a high level signal is inputted to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 when the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are not detected, while a low level signal is inputted when the radio wave is detected and the main control board 16 is detected. When the occurrence of abnormality is determined on the payout control board 17 and the radio wave sensors 163 and 173 are illegally pulled out, a low level signal is input to the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 and the same as when detecting the radio wave. In addition, the main control board 16 and the payout control board 17 can determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the payout control unit 171 has storage means for storing and holding the prize opening information and the round number information transmitted from the main control unit 161 when the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the information of the addition number counter transmitted from the control unit 161 is consistent with the winning prize information and round number information stored and held (see FIGS. 75 and 76). This is called “total prize ball number matching determination”. However, instead of storing and holding winning mouth information and round number information, winning control information and round number information are transmitted together with information on the addition number counter from the main control unit 161 each time, and the payout control which has received it is received. The unit 171 may perform control so as to determine whether or not the information of the received addition number counter is consistent with the received prize opening information and round number information. This is referred to as “every time transmission method of winning mouth information and round number information”.

  (30) When the game board radio wave sensor disconnection detection or the game frame radio wave sensor disconnection detection is input to the payout control board 17, the payout control board 17 may be disabled. Specific examples of the deactivation include stopping transmission of the number of additional balls to the CU 3 and stopping the counting operation of the additional ball counter.

  (31) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (32) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (33) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the coefficient operation means both detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (34) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (35) In S663 of FIG. 76, whether or not there is an abnormality is determined based on whether or not the increment amount (game ball) of the addition number counter in the polling interval is an appropriate value. Then, the information on which winning opening has been won and the information on the number of winning balls added by the winning (number of added balls) are transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17, and in the payout control board 17, The presence / absence of an abnormality may be determined based on whether or not the number of prize balls that should be added according to the prize winning slot matches the received prize ball number information (number of balls to be added). This is called an “individual determination method for each winning mouth”.

  Specifically, the payout control board 17 stores winning award information transmitted from the main control board 16. The content is information on the number of prize balls (number of added balls) associated with each winning opening (see FIG. 74A). If a winning occurs during the game, the information on which winning opening is won and the information on the number of winning balls (added balls) added by the winning are associated with each other from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17. Sent. For example, information such as “winning at the start winning opening 1 and information on the number of winning balls (added ball number) is 5” is sent. The payout control board 17 that has received it refers to the stored prize opening information (FIG. 74 (a)), and stores the number of prize balls (addition balls) stored for the "start prize opening 1". Number) Read “3”. The read prize ball number information (addition ball number) “3” is compared with the received prize ball number information (addition ball number) “5”, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if there is a mismatch.

  In other words, the gaming machines (P units, S units) that give a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize control the progress of the game of the gaming machine, and based on the occurrence of a prize in one of a plurality of types of prizes. Game control means (P main control boards 16 and S main control boards) for generating addition update information for specifying an addition update amount for adding the points corresponding to the winning type to the game points; Provided game parts (game board 26, reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels), and a game frame configured to be able to attach the game parts (P front frame 6, attached to reels and reels in S units) Receiving the addition update information (addition ball number, addition number) generated by the game control means provided in the game frame, and various sensor portions and reels that control the reel) Based on addition update information And a game point processing means (payout control board 17) for adding and updating the game points and subtracting and updating the game points based on the use of the game points for the game, and adding and updating in accordance with the occurrence of the winning The added update amount of the game points to be played is determined in advance according to the type of winning that has occurred (FIG. 74 (a)), and the game control means sets the predetermined added update amount to the specified added update amount. (Winning mouth information is stored in a memory such as a ROM of the main control unit 161 provided on the main control board 16), and a process of transmitting the specified addition update amount to the game point processing means. (FIG. 73: winning opening information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control board 17), the game point processing means determines the added update information and the type of winning that causes the added update information. The number of winnings and the game And the addition update amount depending on whether or not a product value of the number of winnings with respect to a specified addition update amount corresponding to the type of winning is equal to the addition update amount specified by the addition update information. Includes suitability determination means for determining whether or not the size is appropriate.

  Such an “individual determination method for each winning mouth” includes “total winning ball number matching determination” described in the main embodiment, and “the winning mouth information and round number information transmitted every time” described in (29) above. Any of the “method” may be applied.

  (36) The gaming system according to the present embodiment includes a point use operation means for executing a predetermined point use process using points. Here, the predetermined score use processing includes processing for executing the wagon service, or processing for dividing and sharing the score (held ball) (processing for dividing and transferring the score to another person). It is a concept. The holding point use operation means is, for example, a touch panel. Alternatively, the point use operation means may be a remote controller that is given to a clerk of the game store to instruct the CU or the gaming machine to execute the point use processing.

  (37) The sequence control shown in FIG. 36 to FIG. 70 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3, P stand 2, S stand 2S, etc., particularly for processing related to security. Instead, for example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as CU3, P unit 2, jet counter, and POS terminal.

(38) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. Instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the player's fingerprint, retina and other biomass. A determination may be made.

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 63, and the like, the CU presents the score transmitted from the gaming machine on the condition that the card ID matches the insertion time. Is sent from the gaming machine as a further condition that the communication has started before a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has passed since the communication between the gaming machine and the CU3 was interrupted. The score may be controlled so that the CU stores it as the current score. Specifically, a timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) after communication between the gaming machine and CU3 is interrupted is provided in the CU control unit 323 at the start of communication between the gaming machine and CU3 (at the time of recovery). It is determined whether or not the timer is still timed (in a state where time is not up), and on the further condition that it is a result of determination that the timer is timed, the score sent from the gaming machine is the current value of the CU. It controls to memorize as a score.

  Further, instead of the insertion time, the CU may store the score transmitted from the gaming machine on condition that the last serial number used between the CU 3 and the P stand 2 matches, as the current score. .

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win. Instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (the prepaid balance, the possession ball, the accumulated ball) and the corresponding game points are added, the deducted value However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (42) In this embodiment, a key management server is installed in a key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (43) A restriction other than the time restriction may be adopted as the restriction in the restricted communication mode. For example, the amount of game value that can be used for games (remaining usable card amount, usable storage ball, etc.) may be limited.

  (44) The CU control unit 323 receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800 via the hall server 801. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800 to the CU control unit 323 without using the hall server 801 between the key management server 800 and the CU control unit 323. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800 and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801 is provided between the key management server 800 and each CU.

(45) In the above-described embodiment, the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the leaving operation is temporarily added to the holding ball and written to the card to perform the leaving processing, and thereafter When the player who has left the seat returns, the card is inserted into the original card unit again, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball. Indicated. However, instead, the counting ball automatically counted at the time of the leaving operation is stored as a custody ball (also storing the C-ID and insertion time) different from the game ball and the holding ball, and the holding ball is not added. Leave your seat by ejecting the card without having to record the ball. When the discharge card is reinserted, all the custody balls may be automatically converted into P game balls at once and control may be performed. Alternatively, the custody balls in this case are transmitted from the P platform to the CU based on the leaving operation, stored on the CU side or the hall server side, and automatically from the CU or the hall server when the card is inserted again. Alternatively, the information on the custody ball may be transmitted to the P platform side and stored as a game ball on the P platform side. Further, in this case, when the information on the custody balls is transmitted, it may be transmitted from the CU to the P units as a game ball addition command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the number of counting balls automatically counted based on the leaving operation is added to the holding ball and written to the card and discharged, the away flag is set on the card. By keeping a record, the card could not be exchanged for prizes. As a technique for prohibiting the exchange of prizes as described above, the following technique other than using the away flag on the card may be adopted.

  First, when the leaving operation is performed, the information (including the card ID) is transmitted from the CU to the hall server, and the card of the player who is away from the hall server is stored as the leaving card. At the time of prize exchange, an inquiry is made to the hall server from the POS or the like, and the hall server determines whether or not the card used for the prize exchange is an away card. Alternatively, all away card information may be transmitted from the hall server to the POS side in advance. In addition, if the card used for exchanging the prize is an away card, exchanging the prize using the card is prohibited.

  (46) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine determines that the gaming device (CU) is given the game point as the holding point on the condition that the conversion process for all game points is completed (game point = 0). (Processing that accepts a card with a prize exchange machine and consumes the points specified by the card and enables prize exchange, and inserts a card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating the recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) for performing the processing of the CU when used in the same manner.

  Here, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 49, the enabling means is, for example, “means for confirming game point 0 on the P platform side and transmitting the card discharge operation permission ON to the CU”, or “Means to determine whether or not the number of game balls = 0 when receiving a card return notification from the CU, and in the case of 0, a card return response is returned to the CU, thereby enabling the card return”, and Is a concept including “means for setting the number of game balls = 0 by performing a counting operation and the like, thereby establishing a condition for validating card return”.

<Various configurations included in the embodiment>
(1-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a winning and the gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A change amount storage means for storing a change amount scheduled to be transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information and storing the transmitted change amount when the information transmission means transmits the change amount (the latest game table in FIG. 8) Information, the area for storing the last game machine information),
And arrival determination means (payout control unit 171) for determining that the update information has arrived at the gaming apparatus based on predetermined information (serial number) transmitted from the gaming apparatus,
The gaming device is:
Game point storage means for storing the game points (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 8);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Confirmation information transmitting means (CU control unit 323) for transmitting information (serial number) that can confirm the arrival of the update information to the gaming machine based on the reception of the update information,
The information transmission means, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, is the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the change amount already transmitted stored in the change amount storage means Is transmitted to the gaming device (see FIG. 67).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, update information that can specify the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the already transmitted change amount stored in the change amount storage means is used for gaming. Since it is transmitted to the device, the change amount of the game points can be transmitted to the gaming device reliably and efficiently.

(1-2) The present invention uses a gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by a player to give a predetermined gaming point (P units) when a winning occurs. A gaming device (CU) that enables games on S units,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (CU control unit 323),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on the condition that the conversion processing has been completed, the game points are used as the holding points for the predetermined processing (in the gift exchange) A process for accepting a card and consuming the points specified by the card and enabling the exchange of prizes, and a case where the card discharged from the CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used. CU processing) is performed so that the recording medium processing (processing that makes it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card or ID management with the computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323);
Game point storage means for storing the game points (“the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Information receiving means (CU control unit 323) for receiving update information (a response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the amount of change in the gaming points;
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Confirmation information transmitting means (CU control unit 323) for transmitting information (serial number) that can confirm the arrival of the update information to the gaming machine based on the reception of the update information,
The information receiving means, when the update information transmitted from the gaming machine at a predetermined timing has not yet reached, adds a sum of the unreachable update information and the amount of change in the gaming points after the predetermined timing. Receives identifiable update information (see FIG. 67),
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game point storage means based on update information that can specify the total value (see FIG. 67).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. For this reason, the game media obtained by the game can be counted, and the counting result can be specified by the recording media. For a new game using the game points without causing confusion to the player who is used to the conventional game operation. Equipment can be provided.

  Further, when the update information transmitted at a predetermined timing from the gaming machine has not yet arrived, the update information capable of specifying the sum of the unreachable update information and the change amount of the gaming points after the predetermined timing is received. Therefore, the amount of change of game points can be identified reliably and efficiently.

(1-3) In the gaming system according to (1-1),
Display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points into the predetermined points;
The gaming device controls the display means, updates the display of the game points based on the update information, and detects that the operation of the conversion operation means (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) is detected. Display control means (display control unit 350) for converting the gaming points into the predetermined points.

  According to the above configuration, the display of game points and the display of conversion from game points to points on the display means are controlled on the gaming device side, so the control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

(1-4) (1-1) In the gaming system according to (1-3),
Game points for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the game points stored in the game point storage means are a predetermined number or more (3000 balls or more) Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 72) is included.

  According to the above configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed when the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a system that is familiar to players who are accustomed to the gaming system.

(1-5) In the gaming system according to (1-1) (1-3) (1-4),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(1-6) In the gaming system according to (1-1) (1-3) to (1-5),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(1-7) (1) In the gaming system according to (1-3) to (1-6),
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 80) for converting all game points stored in the game point storage unit into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation unit, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 80) for converting a part of the game points stored in the storage means into the holding points can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the game points can be converted completely and partially, so that it is closer to the conventional gaming system that allows partial counting of gaming media obtained by gaming. A new system using game points can be provided.

(1-8) (1-6) In the gaming system according to (1-7),
Service notification control means (display control unit 350; display of goods that can receive a wagon service) that performs control to notify a service that a player can receive using the points,
Deduction means (CU control unit 323) for deducting points necessary for the service from the score stored in the score storage means based on the detected operation of the score use operation means. Including
The service notification control means is a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. Is also controlled not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (by converting the game ball into a current ball with a counting button and adding the converted ball to the current ball Products that can be purchased are displayed as a dotted line, and are not notified as services that the player can receive).

  According to such a configuration, the service that the player can receive using the points is notified, and the service that the player can receive can be recognized. In addition, even when game points are stored in the game point storage means when the score is less than the number required for the predetermined service, the predetermined service is notified as a service that can be received by the player. Since such control is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of points.

(2-1) The present invention is communicatively connected to a gaming device (CU) for giving a predetermined game point upon occurrence of a prize and enabling a game using a player's own gaming value. Game machines (P, S)
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (Dispensing control unit 171),
On the condition that the conversion process for all game points has been completed (game point = 0), the game device accepts the card with the game point as the holding point and receives the card at the prize exchange and is identified by the card. Recording medium for processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CU when card ejected from CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine Validating means for validating the processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) (FIG. 49; game point 0 is confirmed on the P platform side, and the card discharge operation permission ON is transmitted to the CU. To activate the card ejection operation)
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
A change amount storage means for storing a change amount scheduled to be transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information and storing the transmitted change amount when the information transmission means transmits the change amount (the latest game table in FIG. 8) Information, the area for storing the last game machine information),
And arrival determination means (payout control unit 171) for determining that the update information has arrived at the gaming apparatus based on predetermined information (serial number) transmitted from the gaming apparatus,
The information transmission means, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, is the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the change amount already transmitted stored in the change amount storage means Is transmitted to the gaming device (see FIG. 67).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new gaming machine that uses gaming points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional gaming operation that counts gaming media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium The game by can be provided.

  Furthermore, when the arrival determination means does not determine that the update information has arrived, update information that can specify the sum of the change amount scheduled to be transmitted and the already transmitted change amount stored in the change amount storage means is used for gaming. Since it is transmitted to the device, the change amount of the game points can be transmitted to the gaming device reliably and efficiently.

(2-2) In the gaming machine described in (2-1),
The change amount storage means includes:
First change amount storage means for storing the amount of change scheduled to be transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information (FIG. 8; an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball number for storing the additional ball number as the latest game table information) Subtraction ball counter to count),
Second change amount storage means for storing the change amount transmitted by the information transmission means one time before as the update information (FIG. 8; area for storing the number of added balls as previous game table information and the number of subtraction balls Storage area), and
The second change amount storage means uses the stored value of the first change amount storage means when the update information is transmitted based on the storage of the first change amount storage means. A rewrite process for rewriting the stored value of the storage means is executed (see FIG. 8),
The first change amount storage means sets the stored value of the first change amount storage means to an initial value after the rewriting process (FIG. 8; 0 clear).

  According to such a configuration, the change amount that has already been transmitted is backed up by the second change amount storage means, and the new change amount can be stored by the first change amount storage means. Even if the amount of change transmitted as information has not been reached, the amount of change can be specified.

(2-3) (2-1) In the gaming machine described in (2-2),
Game control means (FIG. 38; when the command from CU3 is not transmitted to the P stand 2 is continued) when the communication with the gaming apparatus cannot be performed and the communication becomes impossible. The P platform 2 determines that the communication is interrupted and stops the driving of the launch motor 18 to stop the game.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the game cannot be performed and the game is continued in a state where important communication is not performed between the game device and the gaming machine.

(2-4) In the gaming machine according to (2-1) to (2-3),
The gaming machine is a ball game machine (P units),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at an interval (FIG. 36; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

(3-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and the gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
Change amount storage means for storing the change amount transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information (an area for storing the latest game machine information in FIG. 8);
The gaming device is:
Game point storage means for storing the game points (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 8);
Instruction information transmission means (CU control unit 323) for repeatedly transmitting information for instructing transmission of the update information (status information request);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
The change amount storage means stores the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which information indicating the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Cumulative storage (FIG. 68; cumulative storage of the number of game balls that change while waiting for a status information request)
When the information transmitting unit receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information in a state where the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit is accumulated and stored in the change amount storing unit, the information transmitting unit stores the change amount storing unit. Update information capable of specifying the accumulated amount of change is transmitted (FIG. 68; when the retransmitted status information request is received, the amount of change in the number of game balls accumulated so far is transmitted).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Further, while the state in which the information for instructing transmission of the update information cannot be received even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the transmission of the update information, the amount of change sequentially specified by the specifying means is accumulated on the gaming machine side. Since the update information that can identify the accumulated change amount is transmitted at the stage when the information for instructing the transmission of the update information is received after being stored, communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine Even when the state where the game is interrupted continues, information on the game points can be reliably collected in the game device.

(3-2) The present invention gives a predetermined game point when a prize is generated, and enables a game using a player's own game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.). A gaming machine (P, S) that is communicably connected to a gaming device (CU) for
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (Dispensing control unit 171),
On the condition that the conversion process for all game points has been completed (game point = 0), the game device accepts the card with the game point as the holding point and receives the card at the prize exchange and is identified by the card. Recording medium for processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CU when card ejected from CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine Validating means for validating the processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) (FIG. 49; game point 0 is confirmed on the P platform side, and the card discharge operation permission ON is transmitted to the CU. To activate the card ejection operation)
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
When the game device receives information (state information request) for instructing transmission of update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change, the game device Information transmitting means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting to,
Change amount storage means for storing the change amount transmitted by the information transmission means as the update information (an area for storing the latest game machine information in FIG. 8);
The change amount storage means stores the change amounts sequentially specified by the specifying means while the state in which information indicating the transmission of the update information cannot be received continues even after a predetermined period has elapsed since the update information was transmitted. Cumulative storage (FIG. 68; cumulative storage of the number of game balls that change while waiting for a status information request)
When the information transmitting unit receives the information for instructing transmission of the update information in a state where the change amount sequentially specified by the specifying unit is accumulated and stored in the change amount storing unit, the information transmitting unit stores the change amount storing unit. Update information capable of specifying the accumulated amount of change is transmitted (FIG. 68; when the retransmitted status information request is received, the amount of change in the number of game balls accumulated so far is transmitted).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new gaming machine that uses gaming points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional gaming operation that counts gaming media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium The game by can be provided.

  Furthermore, while the state in which the information for instructing transmission of the update information cannot be received even after a predetermined period has passed since the transmission of the update information, the amount of change sequentially identified by the identifying unit is accumulated and stored, Eventually, when the information for instructing the transmission of the update information is received, the update information that can specify the accumulated change amount is transmitted, so that the communication between the gaming device and the gaming machine is interrupted Even when the game continues, it is possible to reliably collect information on the gaming points in the gaming device.

(3-3) In the gaming system according to (3-1),
Display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points into the predetermined points;
The gaming device controls the display means, updates the display of the game points based on the update information, and detects that the operation of the conversion operation means (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) is detected. Display control means (display control unit 350) for converting the gaming points into the predetermined points.

  According to the above configuration, the display of game points and the display of conversion from game points to points on the display means are controlled on the gaming device side, so the control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

(3-4) (3-1) In the gaming system according to (3-3),
Game points for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the game points stored in the game point storage means are a predetermined number or more (3000 balls or more) Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 72) is included.

  According to the above configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed when the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a system that is familiar to players who are accustomed to the gaming system.

(3-5) In the gaming system according to (3-1) (3-3) (3-4),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(3-6) In the gaming system according to (3-1) (3-3) to (3-5),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(3-7) In the gaming system according to (3-1) (3-3) to (3-6),
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 80) for converting all game points stored in the game point storage unit into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation unit, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 80) for converting a part of the game points stored in the storage means into the holding points can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the game points can be converted completely and partially, so that it is closer to the conventional gaming system that allows partial counting of gaming media obtained by gaming. A new system using game points can be provided.

(3-8) In the gaming system according to (3-6) (3-7),
Service notification control means (display control unit 350; display of goods that can receive a wagon service) that performs control to notify a service that a player can receive using the points,
Deduction means (CU control unit 323) for deducting points necessary for the service from the score stored in the score storage means based on the detected operation of the score use operation means. Including
The service notification control means is a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. Is also controlled not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (by converting the game ball into a current ball with a counting button and adding the converted ball to the current ball Products that can be purchased are displayed as a dotted line, and are not notified as services that the player can receive).

  According to such a configuration, the service that the player can receive using the points is notified, and the service that the player can receive can be recognized. In addition, even when game points are stored in the game point storage means when the score is less than the number required for the predetermined service, the predetermined service is notified as a service that can be received by the player. Since such control is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of points.

(4-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and the gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming device is:
Setting storage means (S757 in FIG. 82) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Appropriateness determination means (S807 to S810 in FIG. 85) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming device, fraud on the gaming machine side can be determined, and a management device connected to the gaming machine or gaming device can be used as gaming information. Compared with determining whether or not the numerical value is appropriate, the burden on the management device or the like can be reduced.

(4-2) The present invention uses a gaming value (for example, a card balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls, etc.) owned by a player to give a predetermined gaming point (P units) when a winning occurs. A gaming device (CU) that enables games on S units,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (CU control unit 323),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on the condition that the conversion processing has been completed, the game points are used as the holding points for the predetermined processing (in the gift exchange) A process for accepting a card and consuming the points specified by the card and enabling the exchange of prizes, and a case where the card discharged from the CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used. CU processing) is performed so that the recording medium processing (processing that makes it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card or ID management with the computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323);
Setting storage means (S757 in FIG. 82) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
Appropriateness determination means (S807 to S810 in FIG. 85) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. For this reason, the game media obtained by the game can be counted, and the counting result can be specified by the recording media. For a new game using the game points without causing confusion to the player who is used to the conventional game operation. Equipment can be provided.

  Furthermore, in order to determine whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate in the gaming device, fraud on the gaming machine side can be determined, and a management device connected to the gaming machine or gaming device can be used as gaming information. Compared with determining whether or not the numerical value is appropriate, the burden on the management device or the like can be reduced.

(4-3) In the gaming system according to (4-1),
The gaming machine is
Game machine side setting storage means (S774 in FIG. 84) for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing the game is appropriate;
And a gaming machine side suitability judging means (S827 to S830 in FIG. 86) for judging whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the gaming machine side setting storing means.

  According to such a configuration, in addition to determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming device, it is determined whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate in the gaming machine. Therefore, even when any of the gaming machine and the gaming device is cheated, the abnormality determination can be appropriately performed.

(4-4) (4-1) In the gaming system according to (4-3),
The gaming device includes disabling means (S811 to S814 in FIG. 85; card discharge processing is prohibited) that disables the predetermined processing when the inappropriateness determination is made by the appropriateness determining means.

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined process is disabled when an improper determination is made, the predetermined process is performed by a predetermined recording medium processing operation after an illegal act. Can be prevented.

(4-5) In the gaming system according to (4-1) (4-3) (4-4),
The gaming machine includes game information transmitting means (latest game table information in FIG. 8, FIG. 12) for transmitting game information to the gaming device,
The suitability determining means determines whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted by the game information transmitting means is appropriate (S801 to S807 in FIG. 85).

  According to such a configuration, for example, the gaming machine is not cheating at all, and the gaming information is altered from the gaming machine to the gaming device by cheating in the communication portion between the gaming machine and the gaming device. Even when is transmitted, abnormality determination is made by the suitability determination means on the gaming device side, and as a result, it is possible to determine fraud in the communication portion.

  (4-6) In the gaming system according to (4-1), (4-3) to (4-5), when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining unit (FIG. 85 further includes error transmission means (S812 in FIG. 85) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate to the host device.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since the information is transmitted from the gaming device to the host device, the host device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(4-7) In the gaming system according to (4-1) (4-3) to (4-6),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(4-8) (4-1) In the gaming system according to (4-3) to (4-7),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(5-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and the gaming value (for example, the card balance, the number of balls, the number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
Game machine side game point storage means for storing the game points (game ball counter of FIG. 8),
The gaming device is:
Game device side game point storage means (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 8) for storing the game points;
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game device side game point storage means based on the update information (see “add game balls number”, “subtract game balls number” in FIG. 8) When,
A game point adding means for deducting the gaming value and adding an equivalent amount to the gaming points stored in the gaming device side gaming point storage means (FIG. 43; deducting the gaming value by depressing a lending button) Confirm the prepaid consumption and add the number of additional balls),
Game information addition means (FIG. 43) for transmitting game point addition information (FIG. 43; game ball addition request ON, number of added balls = 125) capable of specifying the game points to be added to the gaming machine;
The information transmission means stores the update information during addition update processing that can specify the amount of change of the game point specified by the specifying means during the addition update, stored in the gaming machine side game point storage means The point is transmitted to the gaming device together with identifiable information (FIG. 43; status information response (the number of game balls = 172, the number of subtraction balls = 3)), and addition response transmission means (FIG. 43),
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game apparatus side game point storage means based on the transmitted update information during addition update processing (FIG. 43; 175-game balls number). 3 and updated to 172).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Furthermore, when the game point changes on the game machine side while adding and updating the game points based on the game point addition information transmitted from the gaming device to the game machine, the amount of change can be specified during the update process. Since the information is transmitted to the gaming device together with information that can specify the updated game points including the information during the addition update process, information for notifying game point update by the game point addition information, Communication efficiency can be improved compared to the case where information for notifying a change in game points due to a game or the like on the machine side is separately transmitted to the gaming device at different timings.

(5-2) The present invention gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs, and enables a game using a player's own game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.). A gaming machine (P, S) that is communicably connected to a gaming device (CU) for
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (Dispensing control unit 171),
On the condition that the conversion process for all game points has been completed (game point = 0), the game device accepts the card with the game point as the holding point and receives the card at the prize exchange and is identified by the card. Recording medium for processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CU when card ejected from CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine Validating means for validating the processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) (FIG. 49; game point 0 is confirmed on the P platform side, and the card discharge operation permission ON is transmitted to the CU. To activate the card ejection operation)
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
Game machine side game point storage means (game ball counter in FIG. 8) for storing the game points;
Addition information receiving means (FIG. 43) for receiving game point addition information (FIG. 43; game ball addition request ON, number of added balls = 125) that can specify game points to be added in exchange for the withdrawal of the game value. When,
In accordance with the game point addition information, the game point addition update means for adding and updating the game points stored in the gaming machine side game point storage means (FIG. 43; the number of game balls according to the number of added balls of the game ball addition request ON = 125) And update)
During the addition update of the game point, the update information during the addition update process that can specify the amount of change of the game point specified by the specifying unit is specified, and the game point stored in the gaming machine side game point storage unit is specified It transmits to the game device together with possible information (FIG. 43; status information response (number of game balls = 172, number of subtraction balls = 3)) and addition response transmission means (FIG. 43).

According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new gaming machine that uses gaming points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional gaming operation that counts gaming media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium The game by can be provided.

  Furthermore, when the game point changes on the game machine side while adding and updating the game points based on the game point addition information transmitted from the gaming device to the game machine, the amount of change can be specified during the update process. Since the information is transmitted to the gaming device together with information that can specify the updated game points including the information during the addition update process, information for notifying game point update by the game point addition information, Communication efficiency can be improved compared to the case where information for notifying a change in game points due to a game or the like on the machine side is separately transmitted to the gaming device at different timings.

  (5-3) In the gaming system according to (5-1), the gaming point addition means deducts the gaming value without waiting for a response from the gaming machine that has received the gaming point addition information. (FIG. 43; confirm consumption of balance).

  According to such a configuration, when a request for adding gaming points with a reduction in gaming value occurs, the gaming value can be quickly withdrawn without waiting for a response from the gaming machine side. Can do.

(5-4) (5-1) In the gaming system according to (5-3),
Display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points into the predetermined points;
The gaming device controls the display means, updates the display of the game points based on the update information, and detects that the operation of the conversion operation means (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) is detected. Display control means (display control unit 350) for converting the gaming points into the predetermined points.

  According to the above configuration, the display of game points and the display of conversion from game points to points on the display means are controlled on the gaming device side, so the control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

(5-5) In the gaming system according to (5-1) (5-3) (5-4),
Game points for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the game points stored in the game point storage means are a predetermined number or more (3000 balls or more) Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 72) is included.

  According to the above configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed when the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a system that is familiar to players who are accustomed to the gaming system.

(5-6) In the gaming system according to (5-1) (5-3) to (5-5),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(5-7) In the gaming system according to (5-1) (5-3) to (5-6),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(5-8) In the gaming system according to (5-1) (5-3) to (5-7),
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 80) for converting all game points stored in the game point storage unit into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation unit, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 80) for converting a part of the game points stored in the storage means into the holding points can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the game points can be converted completely and partially, so that it is closer to the conventional gaming system that allows partial counting of gaming media obtained by gaming. A new system using game points can be provided.

(5-9) In the gaming system according to (5-7) (5-8),
Service notification control means (display control unit 350; display of goods that can receive a wagon service) that performs control to notify a service that a player can receive using the points,
Deduction means (CU control unit 323) for deducting points necessary for the service from the score stored in the score storage means based on the detected operation of the score use operation means. Including
The service notification control means is a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. Is also controlled not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (by converting the game ball into a current ball with a counting button and adding the converted ball to the current ball Products that can be purchased are displayed as a dotted line, and are not notified as services that the player can receive).

  According to such a configuration, the service that the player can receive using the points is notified, and the service that the player can receive can be recognized. In addition, even when game points are stored in the game point storage means when the score is less than the number required for the predetermined service, the predetermined service is notified as a service that can be received by the player. Since such control is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of points.

(6-1) The present invention uses the gaming machine that grants a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and the gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by the player. A gaming system including a gaming device (CU) that enables gaming with machines (P units, S units),
Conversion operation means (counting buttons 28, 28S) for converting the gaming points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means (CU control unit 323, payout control unit 171) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on the detection of the operation of the conversion operation means;
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on condition that the conversion process is completed (see FIG. 50), the game points are set as predetermined points. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. Recording medium processing (processing to make it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card, or holding the ball with a computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323) for performing (ID management),
The gaming machine is
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can specify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Game point storage means for storing the game points (area for storing the number of game balls in FIG. 8);
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Recovery processing means (FIGS. 54 to 64; communication line disconnection or power supply disconnection) for performing recovery processing for recovering the consistency of game points with the gaming machine by recovering from an incommunicable state incapable of communicating with the gaming machine And later recovery processing)
The gaming machine is unable to communicate by accumulating and storing the amount of change of the gaming points specified by the specifying means during the period from when the incommunicable state occurs until the recovery processing by the recovery processing means is executed. Time accumulation storage means (FIG. 55; after transmitting the status information response of serial number = n + 1, before the next status information request arrives, a power failure occurs, and the change in the gaming machine information during that time is accumulated)
The information transmission means provides the game device with cumulative update information that can specify a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication means when communication is impossible when the recovery processing is performed by the recovery processing means. (FIG. 55; recovery data (previous gaming machine information, current gaming machine information) is notified in the recovery detailed response)
The game point update means updates the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the cumulative update information by performing the recovery process (FIG. 55; the CU receives a recovery detail response). And recovery with the latest game machine information).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new system using game points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional game system that counts game media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium Can provide.

  Further, when recovering from the incommunicable state, cumulative update information that can specify the cumulative change amount of the gaming points stored in the incommunicable cumulative storage means is transmitted to the gaming device, and the gaming device side Since the game points stored in the game point storage means are updated based on the update information, the amount of change in the game points on the gaming machine side from when the communication is disabled until it is restored is also reflected. It becomes possible to provide the game again at an accurate game point.

  Note that, in the communication disabled state, the gaming point changes on the gaming device side, and the change of the gaming point on the gaming device side is transmitted to the gaming machine by the restoration process, and the gaming point is updated (corrected) on the gaming machine side. A specific example of this case is shown in FIG. According to FIG. 64, “the game device is restored from a communication incapable state where communication with the game device cannot be performed, and the restoration processing for restoring the consistency of game points with the game device is performed. The game device includes a recovery processing unit that performs a change amount of the game point specified by the specifying unit during a period from when the communication disabled state occurs until a recovery process is executed by the gaming device. When the restoration process is performed, the gaming device stores a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative communication time non-communication means when the restoration process is performed. “Transmit identifiable cumulative update information to the gaming device” is disclosed.

(6-2) The present invention uses a gaming value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) owned by a player to give a predetermined gaming point (P units) when a winning occurs. A gaming device (CU) that enables games on S units,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (CU control unit 323),
When a predetermined recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) is detected, on the condition that the conversion processing has been completed, the game points are used as the holding points for the predetermined processing (in the gift exchange) A process for accepting a card and consuming the points specified by the card and enabling the exchange of prizes, and a case where the card discharged from the CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine and used. CU processing) is performed so that the recording medium processing (processing that makes it possible to specify the ball with the ID of the card, for example, recording the ball on the card or ID management with the computer) Recording medium processing means (CU control unit 323);
Game point storage means for storing the game points (“the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Information receiving means (CU control unit 323) for receiving update information (a response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) transmitted from the gaming machine and capable of specifying the amount of change in the gaming points;
Game point update means for updating the game points stored in the game point storage means based on the update information (see “adding the number of game balls”, “subtracting the number of game balls” in FIG. 8);
Recovery processing means (FIGS. 54 to 64; communication line disconnection or power supply) for recovering from the incommunicable state where communication with the gaming machine is impossible and restoring the consistency of gaming points with the gaming machine Recovery processing after disconnection)
The gaming point update means transmits, from the gaming machine, cumulative update information that can specify a cumulative change amount of game points from when the communication disabled state occurs until recovery processing by the recovery processing means is executed. When received (FIG. 55; recovery data (previous gaming machine information, current gaming machine information) is notified in the detailed recovery response), the game stored in the gaming point storage means based on the cumulative update information The points are updated (FIG. 55; the CU receives the recovery detailed response and recovers with the latest gaming machine information).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. For this reason, the game media obtained by the game can be counted, and the counting result can be specified by the recording media. For a new game using the game points without causing confusion to the player who is used to the conventional game operation. Equipment can be provided.

  Further, the game machine has accumulated update information that is able to specify a cumulative change amount of gaming points from the time when the communication disabled state is recovered until the time when the recovery processing means performs the recovery process. Since the gaming points stored in the gaming point storage means are updated based on the cumulative update information, the gaming machine side from the time when the communication is disabled until it is restored It becomes possible to provide the game again at an accurate game point that also reflects the change amount of the game point.

(6-3) The present invention is communicatively connected to a gaming device (CU) for giving a predetermined game point upon occurrence of a prize and enabling a game using a player's own gaming value. Game machines (P, S)
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined points based on detection of an operation (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) for converting the gaming points to the predetermined points. (Dispensing control unit 171),
On the condition that the conversion process for all game points has been completed (game point = 0), the game device accepts the card with the game point as the holding point and receives the card at the prize exchange and is identified by the card. Recording medium for processing that allows exchanging prizes by consuming points, and processing of CU when card ejected from CU is inserted into another CU connected to another gaming machine Validating means for validating the processing operation (card return operation (operation of the return button 322)) (FIG. 49; game point 0 is confirmed on the P platform side, and the card discharge operation permission ON is transmitted to the CU. To activate the card ejection operation)
Specific means (addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for specifying the amount of change of the game points;
Information transmission means (payout control unit 171) for transmitting update information (response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change to the gaming device;
The amount of change of the gaming point specified by the specifying means is accumulated and stored during a period from when a communication impossible state incapable of communication with the gaming device occurs until recovery processing by the gaming device is executed. Cumulative storage means when communication is disabled (FIG. 55; after transmitting the status information response of serial number = n + 1, before the next status information request arrives, the power interruption occurs, and the change in the gaming machine information during that time is cumulatively stored) Including
The information transmitting means transmits to the gaming device cumulative update information capable of specifying a cumulative change amount of game points stored in the cumulative storage means when communication is disabled by performing the restoration process ( FIG. 55: Recovery data (previous game machine information, current game machine information) is notified in the recovery detail response).

  According to the above configuration, the recording medium processing operation can be performed through the process of converting all the game points obtained by the game into points by the player's operation. Therefore, a new gaming machine that uses gaming points without causing confusion to a player who is accustomed to the conventional gaming operation that counts gaming media obtained by gaming and makes it possible to specify the counting result by a recording medium The game by can be provided.

  Furthermore, when the communication is restored from the incommunicable state, the cumulative update information that can specify the accumulated change amount of the gaming points stored in the incommunicable cumulative storage means is transmitted to the gaming device, so that the communication incapable state is entered. It is possible to provide the game again at an accurate game point that reflects the amount of change in the game point on the gaming machine side from the time it is recovered to the time.

(6-4) In the gaming system according to (6-1),
Display means (displays 54, 312 and 510) for performing conversion display of the game points into the predetermined points;
The gaming device controls the display means, updates the display of the game points based on the update information, and detects that the operation of the conversion operation means (operation of the counting buttons 28 and 28S) is detected. Display control means (display control unit 350) for converting the gaming points into the predetermined points.

  According to the above configuration, the display of game points and the display of conversion from game points to points on the display means are controlled on the gaming device side, so the control burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

(6-5) (6-1) In the gaming system according to (6-4),
Game points for performing predetermined notification control (control for displaying a prompt for a counting operation on a display) when the game points stored in the game point storage means are a predetermined number or more (3000 balls or more) Notification control means (S489 in FIG. 72) is included.

  According to the above configuration, since predetermined notification control is performed when the number of game points is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of points, a system similar to the conventional system that notifies when the game medium is full can be reproduced in a pseudo manner. It is possible to provide a system that is familiar to players who are accustomed to the gaming system.

(6-6) In the gaming system according to (6-1) (6-4) (6-5),
When a game is being played by the gaming machine using the game points (while the ball is being fired), the game points of the predetermined number or more (for example, 250 points or more) remain on the condition Conversion operation validation means (FIG. 53) for validating the operation of the conversion operation means is included.

  According to the above configuration, when a game using game points is being performed, the conversion operation by the conversion operation means is not effective unless there are at least a predetermined number of game points remaining. The timing when the game points that have not been converted are displayed and the timing when the remaining few game points are consumed by the continuation of the game overlap, and the game points necessary for the game have been converted and displayed as points Regardless of this situation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is continued.

(6-7) In the gaming system according to (6-1) (6-4) to (6-6),
A score storage means for storing the score ("card holding ball (count ball)" on the CU side in FIG. 8);
A point use operation means (touch panel) for executing a predetermined point use process using the points (converting points into game points, sharing points using points, wagon service using points) ; FIG. 5 etc.)
On the basis of detection of the operation of the holding point use operation means, a deduction means for subtracting the points necessary for the holding point use processing from the holding points stored in the holding point storage means (FIG. 69, FIG. 70)
When the score stored in the score storage means is less than the score required for the score use processing, the predetermined notification control (Fig. 69, Fig. 70; "Please press the count button for lack of balls" ”And a display control unit (display control unit 350).

  According to the above configuration, the score use processing can be executed in exchange for the score after conversion, and when the remaining score is less than the number necessary for the score use processing, predetermined notification control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation for converting the game points into points in order to execute the desired point use processing.

(6-8) In the gaming system according to (6-1) (6-4) to (6-7),
A total conversion operation (“total counting” in FIG. 80) for converting all game points stored in the game point storage unit into the holding points in response to an operation on the conversion operation unit, and the game points A partial conversion operation (“partial counting” in FIG. 80) for converting a part of the game points stored in the storage means into the holding points can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, the game points can be converted completely and partially, so that it is closer to the conventional gaming system that allows partial counting of gaming media obtained by gaming. A new system using game points can be provided.

(6-9) In the gaming system according to (6-7) (6-8),
Service notification control means (display control unit 350; display of goods that can receive a wagon service) that performs control to notify a service that a player can receive using the points,
Deduction means (CU control unit 323) for deducting points necessary for the service from the score stored in the score storage means based on the detected operation of the score use operation means. Including
The service notification control means is a case where game points are stored in the game point storage means when the points stored in the score storage means are less than the points required for a predetermined service. Is also controlled not to notify the predetermined service as a service that can be received by the player (by converting the game ball into a current ball with a counting button and adding the converted ball to the current ball Products that can be purchased are displayed as a dotted line, and are not notified as services that the player can receive).

  According to such a configuration, the service that the player can receive using the points is notified, and the service that the player can receive can be recognized. In addition, even when game points are stored in the game point storage means when the score is less than the number required for the predetermined service, the predetermined service is notified as a service that can be received by the player. Since such control is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that the service can be received within the range of points.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

Claims (2)

A gaming system including a gaming machine that gives a predetermined gaming point by the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming device that enables gaming by the gaming machine using a gaming value owned by the player,
Conversion operation means for converting the game points into predetermined points;
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on detection of an operation of the conversion operation means;
Recording medium processing for performing a recording medium process for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed with the game point as the possession point on the condition that the conversion process is completed when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected Means,
The gaming device is:
Setting storage means for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing a game is appropriate;
A game system comprising: suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means. A gaming device that enables a game on a gaming machine that uses a gaming value owned by a player to give a predetermined gaming point by generating a prize,
Conversion processing means for performing conversion processing of the gaming points to the predetermined holding points based on detection of an operation for converting the gaming points into predetermined holding points;
Recording medium processing for performing a recording medium process for processing so that a predetermined process can be performed with the game point as the possession point on the condition that the conversion process is completed when a predetermined recording medium processing operation is detected Means,
Setting storage means for storing settings used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated by the player playing a game is appropriate;
A game apparatus comprising: suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

Images